WO2020200038A1 - Admission control method and device - Google Patents

Admission control method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020200038A1
WO2020200038A1 PCT/CN2020/081415 CN2020081415W WO2020200038A1 WO 2020200038 A1 WO2020200038 A1 WO 2020200038A1 CN 2020081415 W CN2020081415 W CN 2020081415W WO 2020200038 A1 WO2020200038 A1 WO 2020200038A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
terminal device
secondary base
message
resource
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/081415
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王瑞
彭文杰
韩锋
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020200038A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020200038A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/30Connection release
    • H04W76/34Selective release of ongoing connections
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/12Setup of transport tunnels
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/19Connection re-establishment
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/30Connection release
    • H04W76/32Release of transport tunnels
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/27Control channels or signalling for resource management between access points

Definitions

  • This application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a method and device for admission control in the communication field.
  • a terminal communication state is known, that is, a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) deactivated state, referred to as an inactive state.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the core network equipment, access equipment, and terminal equipment all retain the context information of the terminal equipment.
  • the core network equipment and the access equipment have a dedicated signaling connection for the terminal equipment, but the terminal equipment and the access equipment There is no need to maintain RRC connections between devices.
  • the terminal device can have a communication connection with at least two access devices at the same time and can send and receive data, which can be called (dual-connectivity, DC), or multiple connections.
  • DC dual-connectivity
  • the access device responsible for interacting radio resource control messages with the terminal device and interacting with the core network control plane entity may be called a master node (MN), and other access devices
  • MN master node
  • the device may be referred to as a secondary base station (secondary node, SN).
  • the MN does not release the SN, so that the terminal device can quickly resume the data transmission carried by the SN when the terminal device returns to the RRC connected state.
  • the process of the terminal device transitioning from the inactive state to the RRC connected state how to perform admission control on the recovery of the terminal device is an urgent problem to be solved.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a method and device for admission control, which can release the secondary base station SN when the secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment.
  • the first aspect provides a method of access control, including:
  • the secondary base station determines to release the first resource reserved for the terminal device in a radio resource control RRC deactivated state, where the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device;
  • the secondary base station sends a first message to the primary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored.
  • the secondary base station SN may send a first message to the primary base station MN to notify The secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism during the recovery of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • the method before the secondary base station sends the first message to the primary base station, the method further includes:
  • the secondary base station receives a first request from the primary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
  • the first request may be an SN recovery request
  • the first message may be an SN recovery rejection message
  • the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request sent by the primary base station, it can send an SN recovery rejection message to the MN to notify SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment.
  • the first message includes a cause value, and the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station cannot restore the service to the terminal device.
  • the first resource includes at least one of the following:
  • the resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device may be, for example, air interface transmission resources, NG-U interface transmission resources, Xn interface user plane transmission resources between the secondary base station and the primary base station, and Xn between the secondary base station and the primary base station. At least one of the interface control plane transmission resources.
  • the dedicated user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network for the terminal device may include, for example, transport layer information (transport layer information), data transmission channel, and NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device. At least one of the NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the core network to the terminal device.
  • transport layer information transport layer information
  • data transmission channel data transmission channel
  • NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device.
  • the dedicated control plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN may include transport layer information, stream control transmission protocol (SCTP) connection, and UE allocated by the primary base station MN to the terminal device XnAP ID, at least one of the UE XnAP IDs allocated by the secondary base station to the terminal device.
  • SCTP stream control transmission protocol
  • the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN may be an Xn interface.
  • the dedicated user plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN can be the transmission layer information, the data transmission channel, the Xn-U transmission layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device, the primary base station MN At least one of the Xn-U transport layer address information allocated to the terminal device.
  • some implementations of the first aspect further include:
  • the secondary base station sends the reserved context of the terminal device to the primary base station.
  • the context includes at least one of the following information:
  • the context of the terminal device may also include the terminal device-specific user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, and the terminal device-specific control plane connection and user on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN. At least one of surface connection.
  • the determination by the secondary base station to release the reserved first resource includes:
  • the secondary base station determines to release the first resource based on its own load of the secondary base station.
  • the secondary base station SN may determine whether to release the first resource according to its own load. In a possible situation, the secondary base station SN may determine to release the first resource when the load is too heavy and it cannot continue to serve the terminal device, or the secondary base station may determine not to release the first resource when the load is not too heavy.
  • the time-assisted base station SN can continue to serve the terminal equipment, that is, it can resume the RRC connection with the terminal equipment.
  • the secondary base station SN may also determine whether to release the first resource according to other factors, which is not specifically limited in comparison with the embodiments of the present application.
  • a method of access control including:
  • the primary base station receives a first message from the secondary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that it cannot resume service to the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state;
  • the primary base station determines that the secondary base station cannot resume service to the terminal device.
  • the secondary base station SN may send a first message to the primary base station MN to notify The secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • the method before the primary base station receives the first message from the secondary base station, the method further includes:
  • the primary base station sends a first request to the secondary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
  • the first request may be an SN recovery request
  • the first message may be an SN recovery rejection message
  • the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request sent by the primary base station, it can send an SN recovery rejection message to the MN to notify SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment.
  • the first message includes a cause value
  • the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station refuses to restore the service to the terminal device.
  • some implementations of the second aspect further include:
  • the primary base station receives the context of the terminal device from the secondary base station.
  • the context includes at least one of the following information:
  • the context of the terminal device may also include the terminal device-specific user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, and the terminal device-specific control plane connection and user on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN. At least one of surface connection.
  • some implementations of the second aspect further include:
  • the primary base station releases a reserved second resource, where the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on an interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
  • the second resource may include at least one of a control plane connection, a user plane connection, and a transmission resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
  • some implementations of the second aspect further include:
  • the primary base station establishes an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flow/packet data unit PDU session, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station. -U tunnel.
  • some implementations of the second aspect further include:
  • the primary base station sends a second message to the terminal device, where the second message is used to notify the terminal device to release the configuration of the secondary base station, where the configuration of the secondary base station includes SCG configuration and secondary base station configuration At least one of measurement information and power configuration information.
  • the second message is an RRC recovery message or an RRC reconfiguration message.
  • some implementations of the second aspect further include:
  • the primary base station receives a second request sent by the terminal device, where the second request is used to request the terminal device to return to the RRC connected state from the radio resource control RRC deactivated state.
  • the second request includes related information about whether the secondary base station can be restored, and is used to assist the primary base station in determining whether a restoration request can be sent to the secondary base station.
  • a terminal device including:
  • a second message is received from the primary base station, where the second message is used to notify the terminal device to release the configuration of the secondary base station, where the configuration of the secondary base station includes SCG configuration, measurement information configured by the secondary base station, and power configuration At least one of the information;
  • the terminal device releases the configuration of the secondary base station.
  • the secondary base station SN when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the secondary base station SN can notify the primary base station that the secondary base station SN cannot continue to be a terminal Device service, so that the terminal device releases the configuration of the secondary base station. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • a wireless communication device may be a secondary base station or a chip in the secondary base station.
  • the device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation modes. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the device includes a transceiver module.
  • the device further includes a processing module.
  • the transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter.
  • the transceiver module Can include radio frequency circuits or antennas.
  • the processing module may be a processor.
  • the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be a memory, for example. When a storage module is included, the storage module is used to store instructions.
  • the processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute the instructions stored in the storage module or from other instructions, so that the device executes the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation methods.
  • the chip when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module.
  • the chip also includes a processing module.
  • the transceiver module may be, for example, an input/output interface or pin on the chip. Or circuits, etc.
  • the processing module may be a processor, for example.
  • the processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal executes the first aspect and any possible implementation communication methods.
  • the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the storage module may also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory) memory, RAM) etc.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • the processor mentioned in any of the above can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more for controlling the above
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • a wireless communication device may be a main base station or a chip in the main base station.
  • the device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the device includes a transceiver module.
  • the device further includes a processing module.
  • the transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter.
  • the transceiver module Can include radio frequency circuits or antennas.
  • the processing module may be a processor.
  • the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be a memory, for example. When a storage module is included, the storage module is used to store instructions.
  • the processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute instructions stored in the storage module or from other instructions, so that the device executes the communication methods of the second aspect and various possible implementation manners.
  • the chip when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module.
  • the device also includes a processing module.
  • the transceiver module may be, for example, an input/output interface or pin on the chip. Or circuits, etc.
  • the processing module may be a processor, for example.
  • the processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal executes the second aspect and any possible implementation methods.
  • the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the storage module may also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory) memory, RAM) etc.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • the processor mentioned in any of the above can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more for controlling the above
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • the second aspect and various possible implementations are integrated circuits for program execution.
  • a computer storage medium is provided, and program code is stored in the computer storage medium, and the program code is used to instruct the execution of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, or any of the possible implementations thereof.
  • Method of instruction is used to instruct the execution of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, or any of the possible implementations thereof.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, or the third aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • a communication system in an eighth aspect, includes a device capable of implementing the methods and various possible designs of the foregoing first aspect, and the foregoing device capable of implementing the various methods and various possible designs of the foregoing second aspect. Functional device. Further, the communication system may also include the aforementioned terminal equipment.
  • a processor configured to be coupled with a memory, and configured to execute the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, or any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • a chip in a tenth aspect, includes a processor and a communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to communicate with an external device or an internal device.
  • the processor is used to implement the above-mentioned first or second or third aspects or The method in any possible implementation.
  • the chip may further include a memory in which instructions are stored, and the processor is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory or instructions derived from other sources.
  • the processor is used to implement the method in the foregoing first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • the chip can be integrated on the primary base station or the secondary base station.
  • Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 shows another schematic diagram of a network architecture applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7 shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of an admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic flowchart of another method for admission control provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 17 shows a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of another wireless communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
  • FIG. 20 shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • UMTS time division duplex
  • 5G future 5th generation
  • NR new radio
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be called: user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • access terminal user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • the terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to users, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on.
  • some examples of terminals are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets, notebook computers, palmtop computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, and augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grid (smart grid) Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocols , SIP) phone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to wireless modem, vehicle Devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network or terminal devices in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., which
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • the IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. Connect with the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things.
  • the access device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to communicate with a terminal device.
  • the access device may also be called an access network device or a radio access network device, and may be an evolved base station in an LTE system. (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), it can also be a wireless controller in the cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario, or the access device can be a relay station, access point, vehicle-mounted device, or wearable
  • the equipment and the access equipment in the future 5G network or the access equipment in the future evolved PLMN network can be an access point (AP) in a WLAN, or a new radio system (NR) system
  • the gNB in the embodiment of this application is not limited.
  • the access device is a device in the RAN, or in other words, a RAN node that connects a terminal device to a wireless network.
  • gNB transmission reception point
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Node B Node B, NB
  • BSC Base Station Controller
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • Home Base Station for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB
  • BBU Baseband unit
  • wireless fidelity wireless fidelity
  • Wifi wireless fidelity
  • a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • -CP node user plane CU node
  • CU-UP node user plane CU node
  • RAN equipment of DU node may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU).
  • -CP node user plane CU node (CU-UP node) and RAN equipment of DU node.
  • the access device provides services for the cell, and the terminal device communicates with the access device through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell, and the cell may be corresponding to the access device (for example, a base station) A cell.
  • a cell can belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • the small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, and micro cell. Femto cells, etc., these small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • the carrier in the LTE system or the 5G system can have multiple cells working at the same frequency at the same time.
  • the concept of the above-mentioned carrier and the cell can also be considered equivalent.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the concept of carrier and cell can be regarded as equivalent.
  • the terminal equipment accessing a carrier is equivalent to accessing a cell.
  • Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • the terminal device can simultaneously perform dual-connectivity (DC) with two access devices.
  • the access device that is responsible for interacting with the terminal device for radio resource control messages and interacting with the core network control plane entity is the master node (MN), and the other wireless access device It is a secondary base station (secondary node, SN).
  • MN master node
  • SN secondary node
  • the terminal device can also have a communication connection with multiple access devices at the same time and can send and receive data, which can be called multi-connectivity or multi-connectivity (MC).
  • MC multi-connectivity
  • the multiple access devices there can be An access device is responsible for interacting radio resource control messages with the terminal device, and is responsible for interaction with the core network control plane entity. Then, the access device can be called MN, and the other access devices can be called SN.
  • the MN and the SN may be base stations of the same radio access type (RAT), or may be base stations of different RATs.
  • RAT radio access type
  • Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication between the access device and the terminal device follows a certain protocol layer structure.
  • the control plane protocol layer structure may include the radio resource control (RRC) layer, the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, the radio link control (RLC) layer, and the media interface. Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer and other protocol layer functions.
  • the user plane protocol layer structure may include the functions of the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the physical layer; in one implementation, the PDCP layer may also include the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) Floor.
  • SDAP service data adaptation protocol
  • the access device can include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU) , Multiple DUs can be centrally controlled by one CU.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layers of the wireless network.
  • the functions of the PDCP layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the protocol layers below the PDCP, such as the RLC layer and MAC layer, are set in the DU.
  • the CU has functions above the PDCP layer (including PDCP, RRC, and SDAP), and the DU has functions below the PDCP layer (including RLC, MAC, and PHY).
  • This type of protocol layer division is just an example, it can also be divided in other protocol layers, for example, in the RLC layer, the functions of the RLC layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are set in the DU; Or, in a certain protocol layer, for example, part of the functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer below the RLC layer are set in the DU. In addition, it can also be divided in other ways, for example, by time delay, and functions that need to meet the delay requirement for processing time are set in the DU, and functions that do not need to meet the delay requirement are set in the CU.
  • FIG. 3 shows another schematic diagram of a network architecture applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) of the CU can also be separated and realized by dividing them into different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (CU-UP entity).
  • CU-CP entity control plane CU entity
  • CU-UP entity user plane CU entity
  • the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through the DU.
  • the DU can directly pass the protocol layer encapsulation without analyzing the signaling and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU. If the following embodiments involve the transmission of such signaling between the DU and the terminal device, at this time, the sending or receiving of the signaling by the DU includes this scenario.
  • the CU is divided into network equipment on the RAN side of the access network.
  • the CU may also be divided into network equipment on the CN side of the core network, which is not limited here.
  • the devices in the following embodiments of the present application may be located in terminal equipment or network equipment according to their realized functions.
  • the access device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • Fig. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network architecture is a 5G wireless communication system.
  • the overall architecture of the 5G wireless communication system (also known as 5G system, 5GS, 5G system, etc.) consists of 5G core network (also known as 5G Core, 5GCN, 5GC) and NG-RAN (also known as 5G-RAN) composition.
  • 5G is the core network of the 5G wireless communication system
  • NG-RAN is the wireless access network of the 5G wireless communication system.
  • NG-RAN includes two types of RAN nodes (RAN nodes), namely gNB and ng-eNB.
  • the gNB provides terminal devices with new radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack terminations (Terminations).
  • the ng-eNB provides terminal equipment with an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (evolved universal terrestrial radio access, E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol stack termination point.
  • E-UTRA evolved universal terrestrial radio access
  • the core network equipment in the 5GC and the access equipment in the NG-RAN (for example, gNB, ng-eNB) perform data transmission through the NG interface.
  • the Xn interface can be used for data transmission between gNB and gNB, between gNB and ng-eNB, and between ng-eNB and ng-eNB.
  • FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the 5GC may also include more core network equipment, and the NG-RAN may also include base stations of other access technologies.
  • E-UTRA NR DC (referred to as EN-DC) architecture
  • an LTE base station (such as LTE eNB) serves as the primary station MN
  • an NR base station (such as gNB) serves as a secondary station SN for DC
  • the core network equipment is EPC.
  • the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface, and provides air interface transmission resources for data between the terminal device and the EPC.
  • the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface
  • the gNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-U interface, which is the data transmission between the terminal equipment and the EPC Provide air interface transmission resources.
  • the NR base station (such as gNB) serves as the primary station MN
  • the LTE base station (such as ng eNB) serves as the secondary station SN for DC
  • the core network equipment is 5GC.
  • the gNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-C interface or the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between the terminal device and the 5GC.
  • gNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface
  • ng-eNB is connected to 5GC through NG-U interface, providing data transmission between terminal equipment and 5GC Air interface transmission resources.
  • This architecture can also be called option 7 series.
  • the LTE base station (such as ng-gNB) serves as the primary station MN
  • the NR base station (such as gNB) serves as the secondary station SN for DC
  • the core network equipment is 5GC.
  • the ng-eNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-C interface or the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC.
  • the ng-eNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-C interface or the NG-U interface, and the gNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-U interface to provide data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC.
  • Air interface transmission resources are connected to the 5GC through the NG-C interface or the NG-U interface.
  • MN and SN may also be wireless access devices of the same standard.
  • MN and SN are both NR base stations or both LTE base stations. It should be noted that in the network architectures shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the primary station MN and the secondary station SN may perform data transmission through a wired connection or a wireless connection, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the master base station MN may also be referred to as a master cell group (MCG).
  • the secondary base station SN may also be referred to as a secondary cell group (SCG).
  • RRC connection states There are three RRC connection states, namely RRC idle state, RRC connected state, and RRC inactive state.
  • the terminal device deletes the context of the terminal device, but the core network device has the context of the terminal device, and the access device does not have the context of the terminal device.
  • there is no dedicated signaling connection for terminal equipment between the core network equipment and the access equipment such as the NG connection related to the terminal equipment, or the UE-related S1 connection (UE associated S1 connection).
  • the context of the terminal device is, for example, the access stratum (AS) context of the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the core network device When downlink data arrives, the core network device will initiate a paging (paging) for the terminal device in the tracking area (TA) of the terminal device.
  • paging paging
  • the tracking area can also be called a paging area.
  • the terminal device learns whether it needs to switch to the RRC connected state to receive downlink data by monitoring the paging channel.
  • the terminal device When there is uplink data to be sent, the terminal device will actively trigger to enter the RRC connected state to send data.
  • TAU tracking area update
  • the core network device and the access device When the terminal device is in the RRC connected state, the core network device and the access device have the context of the terminal device. In addition, the RRC connection is maintained between the terminal device and the access device, and the terminal device can perform uplink and downlink transmission of data.
  • the terminal device and the access device When the terminal device is in the RRC deactivated state, the terminal device and the access device store the AS context of the terminal device, and the core network device also has the terminal device context. In addition, there is a dedicated signaling connection for terminal equipment between the core network equipment and the access equipment, such as a UE-associated NG connection (UE associated NG connection). But terminal equipment and access equipment do not need to maintain RRC connections.
  • the RRC deactivated state may also be referred to as the RRC deactivated state.
  • the access device can initiate a paging, and the paging area can be an idle paging area (tracking area, TA) or a RAN-based notification area (RNA).
  • the terminal device moves in the RRC deactivated state, location updates are required across paging areas, such as TAU or RAN-based notification area update (RNAU).
  • the deactivated terminal equipment is similar to the connected terminal equipment.
  • the deactivated terminal equipment is similar to the idle state terminal equipment. There is no real-time RRC connection and data transmission. , Need to send downlink data for the terminal device through paging.
  • the AS context of the terminal device is stored on the access device side, which can speed up the recovery of the terminal device to the connected state and quickly perform data transmission.
  • the NG EN-DC architecture in Figure 7 and the DC architecture where MN and SN are both NR base stations, since the base stations are all NG-RAN and are not The 5GC is connected, so when the terminal device is in the NE-DC, NG EN-DC, and NR-NR DC architecture, it can support the RRC deactivated state, that is, the RRC deactivated state.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system, and communication devices in the wireless communication system can have a wireless communication connection relationship.
  • One of the communication devices may be, for example, the first access device (for example, the main base station MN), or a chip configured in the first access device (for example, the main base station MN), and the other of the communication devices may be, for example, the The second access device (for example, the secondary base station SN) or a chip configured in the second access device (for example, the secondary base station SN).
  • the communication device also includes a terminal device, and the terminal device supports an RRC deactivated state.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of an admission control method shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 8, the admission control method may include steps 110 to 130.
  • the secondary base station determines to release the first resource reserved for the terminal device in the radio resource control RRC deactivated state.
  • the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • the primary base station MN may request to suspend the secondary base station SN.
  • the suspended secondary base station SN may reserve resources for the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state, that is, the above-mentioned first resource.
  • reservation may refer to reservation or preservation.
  • the terminal device may be in the RRC deactivated state, or may be transferred from the RRC deactivated state.
  • this embodiment of the application does not limit this.
  • the first resource may include at least one of the following information:
  • the resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station SN for the terminal equipment, the context of the terminal equipment reserved by the secondary base station SN, the dedicated user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station SN for the terminal equipment may be, for example, air interface transmission resources, NG-U interface transmission resources, Xn interface user plane transmission resources between the secondary base station and the primary base station, and the secondary base station and the primary base station At least one of the Xn interface control plane transmission resources between.
  • the dedicated user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network for the terminal device may include, for example, transport layer information (transport layer information), data transmission channel, and NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device. At least one of the NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the core network to the terminal device.
  • transport layer information transport layer information
  • data transmission channel data transmission channel
  • NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device.
  • the dedicated control plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN may include transport layer information, stream control transmission protocol (SCTP) connection, and the primary base station MN allocates terminal equipment At least one of the UE XnAP ID of the UE XnAP ID assigned by the secondary base station to the terminal device.
  • the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN may be an Xn interface.
  • the dedicated user plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN can be the transmission layer information, the data transmission channel, the Xn-U transmission layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device, the primary At least one of the Xn-U transport layer address information allocated by the base station MN to the terminal device.
  • the transport layer address information may include at least one of IP address, port number, and GTP tunnel identifier.
  • the context of the terminal device stored by the secondary base station SN may include at least one of the following information:
  • the configuration of the SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the SN, the security indication and the security result of the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN, etc., are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the context of the terminal device may also include the terminal device-specific user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, and the terminal device-specific control plane connection and user on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN. At least one of surface connection, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first resource may refer to the context of the terminal device reserved by the secondary base station SN.
  • the secondary base station SN may determine to release the reserved first resource dedicated to the terminal device when the terminal device is in the RRC deactivated state. It is understandable that the secondary base station SN determines to release the first resource, which can also be referred to as the secondary base station SN determining not to continue to serve the terminal device or the secondary base station SN does not have the ability to continue to serve the terminal device.
  • the secondary base station SN may determine whether to release the first resource according to its own load. In a possible situation, the secondary base station SN may determine to release the first resource when the load is too heavy and it cannot continue to serve the terminal device, or the secondary base station may determine not to release the first resource when the load is not too heavy.
  • the time-assisted base station SN can continue to serve the terminal equipment, that is, it can resume the RRC connection with the terminal equipment.
  • the secondary base station SN may also determine whether to release the first resource according to other factors, which is not specifically limited in comparison with the embodiments of the present application. For example, when the configuration of the secondary base station SN is changed so that the secondary base station SN cannot accept the terminal device, it may be determined to release the first resource.
  • the secondary base station SN sends a first message to the primary base station MN, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station SN that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored.
  • the primary base station MN receives the first message.
  • the primary base station MN may be the base station that configures the terminal equipment to enter the RRC deactivated state, or may be the base station where the terminal equipment is restored. It should be noted that the base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state and the base station restored by the terminal device may be the same base station or different base stations. As an example, the movement of the terminal device may cause a difference between the base station configured to enter the RRC deactivated state and the base station restored by the terminal device.
  • the first message may carry a cause value, and the cause value may indicate that the secondary base station is overloaded, or it may indicate that the secondary base station cannot restore service to the terminal device.
  • the secondary base station SN may also send the context of the terminal device on the secondary base station side to the primary base station MN.
  • the first message may carry the context of the terminal device on the secondary base station side. It is understandable that the context of the terminal device on the secondary base station side can also be sent to the MN through a message different from the first message.
  • the primary base station determines that the secondary base station cannot resume service to the terminal device.
  • the primary base station may release the reserved second resource after determining that the secondary base station cannot restore service to the terminal device.
  • the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
  • the second resource may include at least one of a control plane connection, a user plane connection, and a transmission resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
  • the transmission resources dedicated to the terminal equipment on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station may be, for example, the user plane transmission resources of the interface between the secondary base station and the primary base station, and the transmission resources between the secondary base station and the primary base station. At least one of the interface control plane transmission resources.
  • the dedicated control plane connection and user plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the primary base station MN can acquire the context on the secondary base station side.
  • the primary base station MN can obtain the configuration information of the terminal device by the secondary base station SN according to the context.
  • the primary base station can reconfigure the terminal device delta according to the configuration information, or send the configuration information to the new secondary base station for use in the new secondary base station Reference for configuration.
  • the primary base station MN may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, where, before the primary base station MN releases the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on On the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station MN.
  • MN#1 can also perform path switch. In this way, it is possible to transfer the NG-U tunnel originally carried on the SN's QoS flow/PDU session (session) to the MN.
  • the secondary base station SN may send a first message to the primary base station MN to notify The secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, where the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1.
  • FIG. 9 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 9.
  • the various steps in FIG. 9 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 9, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 9 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN may release part of the configuration of the terminal device based on the request message, such as the RLC layer and the following configuration.
  • steps 202 and 203 can be interchanged, that is, the order of 202 and 203 is not limited.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 203 to MN#1.
  • acknowledgement acknowledgement, ACK
  • the ACK may carry the context of the terminal device on the SN side.
  • the context can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#1, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
  • MN#1 sends an SN resume request (SN resume request) to the SN, which is used to request the SN to resume service to the terminal device.
  • the SN recovery request may be an example of the first request.
  • the SN recovery request may be an SN modification request (SN modification request), which carries indication information, which is used to instruct the SN to generate or update the SCG configuration for the terminal device, so that the SN is informed that the message indicates that the SN is requested to recover .
  • SN modification request SN modification request
  • SN determines that the load is too heavy.
  • the SN can determine whether it can continue to provide services for the terminal device according to its own load. When the SN determines that it is overloaded, it cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device. At this time, the SN determines to release the first resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • the first resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the SN determines that there is no overload, the SN determines to continue to provide services for the terminal device, that is, there is no need to release the first resource.
  • step 207 may also occur before step 206.
  • the SN sends an SN resume reject (SN resume reject) message to MN#1, which is used to indicate that the request for continued service to the terminal device is rejected.
  • SN resume reject SN resume reject
  • the SN recovery rejection message corresponds to an example of the first message in FIG. 8.
  • the SN recovery rejection message carries a reason value, indicating that the SN is overloaded, that is, it indicates that the SN cannot recover the service to the terminal device.
  • the SN restoration rejection message may be an SN modification confirmation message or an SN modification failure message.
  • MN#1 receives an SN recovery rejection message (such as an SN modification confirmation message or an SN modification failure message), and needs to know that the message does not indicate a modification failure, but that the SN cannot successfully recover. The effect is equivalent to SN is released.
  • the SN modification confirmation message or the SN modification failure message includes a reason value, which indicates that the SN refuses to continue serving the terminal device.
  • the SN recovery rejection message may also include the context of the terminal device on the SN side.
  • the SN releases the first resource reserved for the terminal device at the same time or after sending the SN recovery rejection message, and the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • MN#1 receives the SN recovery rejection message, and according to the message, determines that the SN cannot continue to serve the terminal device. At this time, MN#1 can release the second resource, which is a dedicated resource of the terminal device on the interface between MN#1 and the SN. Specifically, the second resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • MN#1 may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flow/packet data unit PDU session, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried in all On the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station.
  • the SN when the SN determines to continue serving the terminal device, the SN sends an SN recovery confirmation message to MN#1 to indicate that it can continue to serve the terminal device.
  • the SN recovery request message is an SN modification request message
  • the SN recovery confirmation message may be an SN modification confirmation message.
  • MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the configuration information may include indication information for informing the terminal device to release the SN-related configuration.
  • the SN-related configuration specifically includes at least one of the following information: SCG configuration, SN configuration measurement information, power configuration information, and so on.
  • the configuration information can be carried in the RRC recovery message or carried in the RRC reconfiguration message.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request, it can send the SN to the MN Send an SN recovery rejection message to notify the SN that it cannot continue to serve the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (for example, MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery
  • the main base station (such as MN#2) is different.
  • FIG. 10 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 10.
  • the various steps in FIG. 10 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 10, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 10 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 303 to MN#1.
  • acknowledgement acknowledgement, ACK
  • steps 301 to 304 can refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG.
  • the terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#2, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request can carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN. It can be understood that after the terminal device moves from MN#1 to MN#2, it will send a recovery request to MN#2.
  • MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
  • the context is the context of the terminal device saved on the MN#1 side.
  • the context includes at least one of the following information:
  • the SDAP configuration corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow, the security indication and the security result of the PDU session/QoS flow carried by MN#1, etc., are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • MN#2 may also instruct MN#1 to request restoration of SN.
  • MN#1 sends the context of the terminal device on the MN side to MN#2.
  • MN#1 may also send the SN identification and the terminal device identification to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device identifier may be the terminal device identifier on the Xn interface assigned to the terminal device by the SN.
  • the terminal device identifier may be SN UE XnAP ID.
  • MN#1 may also send indication information to MN#1 to indicate to MN#2 that MN#1 has suspended the SN for the terminal device.
  • MN#2 sends an SN resume request (SN resume request) to the SN, which is used to request the SN to resume service to the terminal device.
  • SN resume request an SN resume request
  • the SN recovery request may include a terminal device identification, which is used by the SN to identify the terminal device.
  • the terminal device identifier may be the identifier on the Xn interface allocated by the SN for the terminal device.
  • the SN recovery request may be an SN modification request (SN modification request), which carries indication information, which is used to instruct the SN to generate or update the SCG configuration for the terminal device, so that the SN is informed that the message indicates that the SN is requested to recover .
  • SN modification request SN modification request
  • SN determines that the load is too heavy.
  • the SN sends an SN resume reject (SN resume reject) message to MN#2, which is used to indicate that the request for continued service to the terminal device is rejected.
  • SN resume reject SN resume reject
  • MN#2 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • steps 309 to 311 the interaction process between SN and MN#2 can be referred to the description in the interaction process between SN and MN#1 in steps 207 to 209 in FIG. 8. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request, it can send the SN to the MN Send an SN recovery rejection message to notify the SN that it cannot continue to serve the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, where the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1.
  • FIG. 11 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 11.
  • the steps in Fig. 11 can be performed in a different order from that presented in Fig. 11, and it is possible that not all the operations in Fig. 11 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 403 to MN#1.
  • steps 401 to 404 can refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG.
  • SN determines that the load is too heavy.
  • the SN can determine whether it can continue to provide services for the terminal device according to its own load. When the SN determines that it is overloaded, it cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device and can execute 406. At this time, the SN determines to release the first resource dedicated to the terminal device. Specifically, the first resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the SN determines to continue to provide services for the terminal device, that is, there is no need to release the first resource. At this time, the SN does not need to send a message to MN#1.
  • MN#1 can consider that SN can continue to be Terminal equipment service.
  • MN#1 when the ACK in step 404 includes the context of the terminal device on the SN side, if MN#1 receives the recovery request sent by the terminal device, and does not receive the SN release request message actively sent by the SN, then MN#1 can restore the SN according to the context of the terminal device on the SN side in the ACK.
  • the SN sends an SN release request message to MN#1 for requesting the release of the first resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • the SN requests the release of the first resource, which means that the SN cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device. That is to say, in this embodiment of the application, when the SN determines that it cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device, it can actively send an SN release request message to MN#1.
  • the SN release request message corresponds to an example of the first message in FIG. 8.
  • the SN release request message may also include the context of the terminal device on the SN side.
  • the SN releases the first resource reserved for the terminal device at the same time or after sending the SN release request message, and the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • MN#1 receives the SN release request message, and according to the message, determines that the SN cannot continue to serve the terminal device. At this time, MN#1 can release the second resource, which is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between MN#2 and the SN.
  • the second resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • MN#1 sends an SN release confirmation message to the SN.
  • the MN may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on the auxiliary On the NG-U tunnel of the base station.
  • the terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#1, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
  • MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
  • the embodiment of the present application when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the SN can actively send an SN release request message to the MN to indicate SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (such as MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery
  • the main base station such as MN#2
  • FIG. 12 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 12.
  • the various steps in FIG. 12 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 12, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 12 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 503 to MN#1.
  • steps 501 to 504 can refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • SN determines that the load is too heavy.
  • the SN sends an SN release request message to MN#1 to request the release of the first resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • MN#1 sends an SN release confirmation message to the SN.
  • steps 505 to 507 can be referred to the descriptions of steps 405 to 407 in FIG. 11, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#2, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
  • MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
  • MN#1 sends the context of the terminal device on the MN side to MN#2.
  • steps 509 and 510 can be referred to 306 and 307 in FIG. 10, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • MN#1 may notify MN#2 that the suspended SN has been released.
  • MN#2 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
  • the embodiment of the present application when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the SN can actively send an SN release request message to the MN to indicate SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1.
  • FIG. 13 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 13.
  • the various steps in FIG. 13 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 13, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 13 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 603 to MN#1.
  • steps 601 to 604 may refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • SN informs MN#1 of its own load information.
  • the SN can periodically send load information to MN#1.
  • the SN can send load information to MN#1 based on an event trigger.
  • the specific event may be sending updated load information to MN#1 when the load information changes.
  • the load information may be a change from a low load to a high load, or a change from a high load to a low load.
  • the load information may be a quantified numerical interval, or a simple level indicator (for example, high, medium, low), etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device sends a recovery request to MN#1 for requesting to recover from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
  • MN#1 judges whether it is overloaded according to the SN load information received in 605.
  • step 607 may be performed after step 606, that is, after receiving the recovery request from the terminal device, the MN determines whether to send the SN recovery request message or the SN release request message to the SN based on the load information of the SN.
  • step 608a and step 609a are executed, and the RRC connection state of the terminal device with MN#1 and SN will be restored.
  • MN#1 sends an SN recovery request to the SN.
  • SN sends SN recovery confirmation to MN#1.
  • steps 608a and 609a can refer to the process of restoring SN in the prior art, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the MN can actively trigger the SN release process, that is, perform step 608b and step 609b.
  • MN#1 sends an SN release request to the SN to request the release of the SN. If the SN is released, the SN cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device. Specifically, the SN can release the first resource dedicated to the terminal device. Specifically, the first resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • MN#1 may release the second resource when or after sending the SN release request to the SN.
  • the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the MN and the SN.
  • the second resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the MN may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on the auxiliary On the NG-U tunnel of the base station.
  • SN sends SN release confirmation to MN#1.
  • the SN release confirmation may include the SN side terminal device context.
  • the SN releases the first resource reserved for the terminal device at the same time or after sending the SN release request message, and the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
  • the secondary base station when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, the secondary base station sends its own load information to the primary base station, and the primary base station determines that the secondary base station is overloaded and cannot continue to serve as the terminal device.
  • the primary base station determines that the secondary base station is overloaded and cannot continue to serve as the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (for example, MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery
  • the main base station (such as MN#2) is different.
  • FIG. 14 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 14.
  • the various steps in FIG. 14 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 14, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 14 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 703 to MN#1.
  • acknowledgement acknowledgement, ACK
  • steps 701 to 704 can be referred to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • SN informs MN#1 of its own load information.
  • step 705 refers to the description of step 605 in FIG. 13, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device sends a recovery request to MN#2 for requesting to recover from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
  • MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
  • MN#1 judges whether it is overloaded according to the SN load information received in 705.
  • steps 709a to 711a are executed, and the RRC connection state of the terminal device with MN#1 and SN will be restored.
  • MN#1 sends the terminal device context to MN#2.
  • MN#2 sends an SN recovery request to the SN.
  • the MN can actively trigger the SN release process, that is, perform step 710b and step 711b.
  • MN#1 sends an SN release request to the SN to request the release of the SN.
  • SN sends SN release confirmation to MN#1.
  • steps 706 and 707 may be performed before 709b to 711b (or 709a to 711a). That is, when MN#2 requests a context from MN#1, MN#1 can determine that the terminal device requests to restore to the RRC connected state. At this time, MN#1 can judge whether SN is overloaded. If MN#1 determines that the SN is overloaded, it actively triggers the SN release process, that is, steps 709b to 711b are executed. If the SN is not overloaded, steps 709a to 711a are executed.
  • steps 706 and 707 may be performed after 709b to 711b. That is, when MN#1 determines that the SN is overloaded, it will actively trigger the SN release process, that is, execute 710b and step 711b. After that, if MN#2 requests context from MN#1, MN#1 can execute 709b.
  • MN#1 sends the terminal device context to MN#2.
  • MN#1 may also notify MN#2 that the suspended SN has been released.
  • a cause value can be carried in it, which indicates that the SN is overloaded.
  • MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
  • the secondary base station when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, the secondary base station sends its own load information to the primary base station, and the primary base station determines that the secondary base station is overloaded and cannot continue to serve as the terminal device.
  • the primary base station determines that the secondary base station is overloaded and cannot continue to serve as the terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flow chart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, where the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1.
  • FIG. 15 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 15.
  • the various steps in FIG. 15 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 15, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 15 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 803 to MN#1.
  • steps 801 to 804 can be referred to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#1, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
  • MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to establish an MCG RLC bearer, and associate the above MCG RLC bearer with the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN.
  • MN#1 is based on the mapping relationship between the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN in the terminal device context received in step 804 and the data radio bearer DRB, without changing the above mapping relationship, and establishes a link for the above DRB.
  • a corresponding MCG RLC bearer and is associated with the above DRB identifier.
  • the effect achieved by the above approach is to retain the mapping relationship between the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the SN and the DRB, and replace the SCG RLC bearer associated with the original DRB with the MCG RLC bearer.
  • the PDU session/QoS data carried by the original SN still passes through the data transmission channel between NG-U and SN, and is processed by SN's SDAP and PDCP.
  • the difference is that the above-mentioned data processed through SN and MN#1 The interface between them is further sent to the terminal device through the MCG RLC bearer.
  • the upstream direction is similar.
  • MN#1 sends an SN recovery instruction to the SN, which is used to instruct the SN to resume service to the terminal device.
  • the recovery indication is also used to instruct the SN to start the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN and the corresponding SDAP and PDCP uplink and downlink data transmission.
  • the recovery indication message also includes the mapping relationship between the PDU session/QoS flow and the MCG RLC bearer carried on the SN.
  • the recovery indication message also includes transport layer address information used for MN#1 to receive downlink data to be carried on the MCG RLC bearer.
  • the SN sends an SN recovery response, such as an SN recovery confirmation message, to MN#1.
  • the recovery confirmation message further includes the transport layer address information used for the SN to receive the uplink data that will carry the MCG RLC bearer.
  • the recovery confirmation message also includes the configuration of the SCG, which is used for the terminal device to update the configuration on the SN side.
  • MN#1 sends the configuration of the SCG received from the SN to the terminal device for the terminal device to update the configuration on the SN side.
  • the primary base station MN when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and resumes the RRC connection, the primary base station MN only retains the SDAP and PDCP processing on the secondary base station SN, and does not use the secondary base station SN. Instead, it allocates physical wireless transmission resources on the primary base station MN (such as MCG RLC bearer) for all the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN, thereby reducing the recovery on the secondary base station SN.
  • the overhead of the terminal equipment service ensures that the secondary base station SN can resume the service to the terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application introduces the process of reconfiguring the SCG RLC bearer into the MCG RLC bearer during the process of the terminal device resuming the DC operation, thereby ensuring that the secondary base station SN can recover successfully.
  • a reconfiguration operation in the recovery process is introduced, so that the secondary base station SN can complete the configuration update on the secondary base station SN based on its own situation (for example, load).
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (such as MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery
  • the main base station such as MN#2
  • FIG. 16 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 16.
  • the steps in FIG. 16 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 16, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 16 are to be performed.
  • MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in an RRC deactivated state.
  • MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
  • the SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 903 to MN#1.
  • steps 901 to 904 can be referred to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#2, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state.
  • the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
  • MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
  • MN#1 sends the context of the terminal device on the MN side to MN#2.
  • steps 906 and 907 may refer to steps 306 and 307 in FIG. 10, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • MN#1 may notify MN#2 of the identification information of the suspended SN and the identification allocated by the SN for the terminal device.
  • the identification may be UE XnAP ID.
  • MN#2 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
  • MN#2 sends an SN recovery instruction to the SN, which is used to instruct the SN to resume service to the terminal device.
  • the SN recovery instruction here, reference may be made to the description of the SN recovery instruction in step 807 in FIG. 15.
  • the SN recovery instruction message further includes an identifier assigned by the SN to the terminal device, which is used by the SN to identify the terminal device.
  • the identifier may be the UE XnAP ID.
  • the SN sends an SN recovery response, such as an SN recovery confirmation message, to MN#2.
  • an SN recovery confirmation message such as an SN recovery confirmation message
  • the configuration information can refer to the description of the SN recovery confirmation message in step 807 in FIG. 15, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • 911, MN#2 sends the configuration of the SCG received from the SN to the terminal device for the terminal device to update the configuration on the SN side.
  • the primary base station MN when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and resumes the RRC connection, the primary base station MN only retains the SDAP and PDCP processing on the secondary base station SN, and does not use the secondary base station SN. Instead, it allocates physical wireless transmission resources on the primary base station MN (such as MCG RLC bearer) for all the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN, thereby reducing the recovery on the secondary base station SN.
  • the overhead of the terminal equipment service ensures that the secondary base station SN can resume the service to the terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application introduces the process of reconfiguring the SCG RLC bearer into the MCG RLC bearer during the process of the terminal device resuming the DC operation, thereby ensuring that the secondary base station SN can recover successfully.
  • a reconfiguration operation in the recovery process is introduced, so that the secondary base station SN can complete the configuration update on the secondary base station SN based on its own conditions (such as load).
  • the method implemented by the primary base station can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the primary base station, and the method implemented by the secondary base station can also be implemented by the secondary base station. Components (such as chips or circuits) are implemented.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus 1000 provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • the device 1000 may be a secondary base station, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in the secondary base station.
  • the device 1000 may include a processing unit 1010 (that is, an example of a processor) and a transceiver unit 1030.
  • the transceiver unit 1030 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit or interface circuit.
  • the device may further include a storage unit 1020.
  • the storage unit 1020 is used to store instructions.
  • the storage unit may also be used to store data or information.
  • the storage unit 1020 may be realized by a memory.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1020, so that the apparatus 1000 implements the steps performed by the secondary base station in the foregoing method.
  • the processing unit 1010, the storage unit 1020, and the transceiver unit 1030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the storage unit 1020 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 1010 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 1020 to control the transceiver unit 1030 to receive and/or send signals to complete the above method.
  • the storage unit 1020 may be integrated in the processing unit 1010, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 1010.
  • the transceiver unit 1030 may include a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively called a transceiver.
  • the transceiver unit 1030 may include an input interface and an output interface.
  • the function of the transceiver unit 1030 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processing unit 1010 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
  • a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the communication device (for example, a secondary base station) provided in the embodiment of the present application. That is, the program code for realizing the functions of the processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1030 is stored in the storage unit 1020. The general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1030 by executing the code in the storage unit 1020.
  • the processing unit 1010 is configured to determine to release a first resource reserved for a terminal device in a radio resource control RRC deactivated state, where the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1030 is configured to send a first message to the primary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored.
  • the transceiver unit 1030 is further configured to receive a first request from the primary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
  • the first message includes a cause value
  • the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station cannot restore service to the terminal device.
  • the first resource includes at least one of the following:
  • the transceiver unit 1030 is further configured to send the reserved context of the terminal device to the primary base station.
  • the context includes at least one of the following information:
  • the processor 1010 may specifically determine to release the first resource based on its own load.
  • Each unit in the above embodiments may also be referred to as a module or circuit or component.
  • the functions and actions of the modules or units in the device 1000 listed above are only exemplary.
  • the modules or units in the device 1000 can be used to execute the above methods. Actions or processing procedures performed by the secondary base station.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus 1100 provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • the device 1100 may be a main base station, or may be a chip or a circuit, for example, a chip or a circuit that may be set in an access device.
  • the apparatus 1100 may include a processing unit 1110 (ie, an example of a processor) and a transceiver unit 1130.
  • the transceiver unit 1030 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit or interface circuit.
  • the device may further include a storage unit 1120.
  • the storage unit 1120 is used to store instructions.
  • the storage unit may also be used to store data or information.
  • the storage unit 1120 may be realized by a memory.
  • the processing unit 1110 is used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the device 1100 implements the steps performed by the master base station (for example, MN#1 or MN#2) in the above method.
  • the master base station for example, MN#1 or MN#2
  • the processing unit 1110, the storage unit 1120, and the transceiver unit 1130 may communicate with each other through internal connection paths, and transmit control and/or data signals.
  • the storage unit 1120 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 1110 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 1120 to control the transceiver unit 1130 to receive and/or send signals to complete the above method. Steps for terminal equipment.
  • the storage unit 1120 may be integrated in the processing unit 1110, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 1110.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 includes a receiver and a transmitter.
  • the receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively called a transceiver.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 includes an input interface and an output interface.
  • the function of the transceiver unit 1130 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processing unit 1110 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
  • a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the communication device (for example, the main base station) provided in the embodiment of the present application. That is, the program code for realizing the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiver unit 1130 is stored in the storage unit 1120, and the general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiver unit 1130 by executing the code in the storage unit 1120.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to receive a first message, and the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored, wherein the terminal device is in radio resource control RRC deactivation state.
  • the processing unit 1110 is configured to determine, according to the first message, that the secondary base station cannot restore the service to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send a first request to the secondary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
  • the first message includes a cause value
  • the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station refuses to restore the service to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to receive the context of the terminal device by the primary base station from the secondary base station.
  • the context includes at least one of the following information:
  • the processing unit 1110 is further configured to release a reserved second resource by the primary base station, where the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
  • the processing unit 1110 is further configured for the primary base station to establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/ The PDU session is carried on the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station.
  • the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send a second message to the terminal device, where the second message is used to notify the terminal device to release the configuration of the secondary base station, where the configuration of the secondary base station includes At least one of SCG configuration, measurement information configured by the secondary base station, and power configuration information.
  • modules or units in the device 1100 listed above are only exemplary.
  • the modules or units in the device 1100 can be used to execute the above methods.
  • Each action or processing procedure executed by the primary base station for example, MN#1 or MN#2, here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1200 provided by this application.
  • the terminal device 1200 can perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 19 only shows the main components of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 1200 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to execute the above-mentioned transmission precoding matrix instruction method embodiment The described action.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above embodiments.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 19 only shows a memory and a processor. In actual terminal devices, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data.
  • the processor in FIG. 19 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors and are interconnected by technologies such as buses.
  • the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built in the processor, or can be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and control circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit 1210 of the terminal device 1200, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 1220 of the terminal device 1200.
  • the terminal device 1200 includes a transceiver unit 1210 and a processing unit 1220.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1210 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1210 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 1300 provided by an embodiment of the application, which may be used to implement the function of an access device (for example, a primary base station or a secondary base station) in the foregoing method.
  • the network equipment 1300 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DU) 1320.
  • RRU 1310 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 1311 and a radio frequency unit 1312.
  • the RRU 1310 part is mainly used for receiving and sending of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending the signaling messages described in the foregoing embodiments to terminal equipment.
  • the BBU 1320 part is mainly used for baseband processing, control of base stations, and so on.
  • the RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
  • the BBU (processing unit) 1320 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network of a single access standard (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), and may also support different connections. Enter the standard wireless access network.
  • the BBU 1320 further includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322.
  • the memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the memory 1321 stores the codebook in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 1321 and the processor 1322 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • all or part of the functions of part 1320 and part 1310 can be realized by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip
  • the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices, the program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the relevant functions of the base station.
  • the base station function chip can also read a memory external to the chip to implement related functions of the base station.
  • FIG. 20 It should be understood that the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 20 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation in the embodiment of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other base station structures that may appear in the future.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned primary base station and secondary base station. Further, the communication system may also include the aforementioned terminal equipment.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), and dedicated integration Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Take memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
  • the foregoing embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center that includes one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a wireless communication system, which includes the above-mentioned primary base station and secondary base station. Further, the above-mentioned terminal device may also be included in the system.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the steps performed by the primary base station or the steps performed by the secondary base station in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, realizes the steps performed by the primary base station or the steps performed by the secondary base station in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a system chip, which includes a communication unit and a processing unit.
  • the processing unit may be a processor, for example.
  • the communication unit may be, for example, an input/output interface, a pin, or a circuit.
  • the processing unit can execute computer instructions so that the chip in the communication device executes the steps performed by the primary base station or the steps performed by the secondary base station provided in the above embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer instructions are stored in a storage unit.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (digital versatile discs, DVDs) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • magnetic storage devices for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.
  • optical disks for example, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (digital versatile discs, DVDs) Etc.
  • smart cards and flash memory devices for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • the term "machine-readable medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • pre-acquisition may include being indicated by network device signaling or pre-defined, for example, protocol definition.
  • pre-defined can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in the equipment (for example, including terminal equipment and network equipment). This application does not make any specific implementation methods. limited.
  • the “saving” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to being stored in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device.
  • the type of the memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • protocol in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in embodiments of the present invention are an admission control method and device enabling release of a secondary node (SN) when the secondary node (SN) is no longer able to provide a service to a terminal apparatus. The admission control method comprises: a secondary node determining to release a first resource reserved for a terminal apparatus in a radio resource control (RRC) inactive mode, wherein the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal apparatus; and the secondary node sending a first message to notify a master node that the secondary node is unable to resume service provision for the terminal apparatus.

Description

准入控制的方法和装置Access control method and device
本申请要求于2019年3月29日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910251469.5、申请名称为“准入控制的方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 201910251469.5, and the application name is "Access Control Method and Apparatus" on March 29, 2019, the entire content of which is incorporated into this application by reference .
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体的,涉及通信领域中的准入控制的方法和装置。This application relates to the communication field, and more specifically, to a method and device for admission control in the communication field.
背景技术Background technique
目前,已知一种终端通信状态,即,无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)去激活状态,简称去激活(inactive)状态。在该inactive状态下,核心网设备、接入设备和终端设备都保留有终端设备的上下文信息,核心网设备和接入设备之间具有该终端设备专用的信令连接,但是终端设备和接入设备之间不需要维护RRC连接。Currently, a terminal communication state is known, that is, a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) deactivated state, referred to as an inactive state. In this inactive state, the core network equipment, access equipment, and terminal equipment all retain the context information of the terminal equipment. The core network equipment and the access equipment have a dedicated signaling connection for the terminal equipment, but the terminal equipment and the access equipment There is no need to maintain RRC connections between devices.
一种可能的方式中,终端设备可以同时与至少两个接入设备存在通信连接并可以收发数据,可以称之为(dual-connectivity,DC),或多连接。该至少两个接入设备之中,可以将负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息,并负责和核心网控制平面实体交互的接入设备称为主基站(master node,MN),其他接入设备可以称之为辅基站(secondary node,SN)。In one possible manner, the terminal device can have a communication connection with at least two access devices at the same time and can send and receive data, which can be called (dual-connectivity, DC), or multiple connections. Among the at least two access devices, the access device responsible for interacting radio resource control messages with the terminal device and interacting with the core network control plane entity may be called a master node (MN), and other access devices The device may be referred to as a secondary base station (secondary node, SN).
在DC架构下,当终端设备进入Inactive状态时,MN不释放SN,以便于终端设备在恢复到RRC连接态时,能够快速的恢复SN承载的数据传输。但是,在终端设备在由inactive状态到RRC连接态转换的过程中,如何对终端设备的恢复进行准入控制是亟需解决的问题。Under the DC architecture, when the terminal device enters the Inactive state, the MN does not release the SN, so that the terminal device can quickly resume the data transmission carried by the SN when the terminal device returns to the RRC connected state. However, in the process of the terminal device transitioning from the inactive state to the RRC connected state, how to perform admission control on the recovery of the terminal device is an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了准入控制的方法和装置,能够在辅基站SN不能继续为终端设备服务时,释放该辅基站SN。The embodiment of the present application provides a method and device for admission control, which can release the secondary base station SN when the secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment.
第一方面,提供了一种准入控制的方法,包括:The first aspect provides a method of access control, including:
辅基站确定释放为无线资源控制RRC去激活态的终端设备保留的第一资源,其中,所述第一资源为专用于所述终端设备的资源;The secondary base station determines to release the first resource reserved for the terminal device in a radio resource control RRC deactivated state, where the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device;
所述辅基站向主基站发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于通知所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The secondary base station sends a first message to the primary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,当终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备时,辅基站SN可以向主基站MN发送第一消息,来通知辅基站SN不能继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释 放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the secondary base station SN may send a first message to the primary base station MN to notify The secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism during the recovery of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,在所述辅基站向所述主基站发送第一消息之前,还包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, before the secondary base station sends the first message to the primary base station, the method further includes:
所述辅基站从所述主基站接收第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述辅基站恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The secondary base station receives a first request from the primary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
作为示例,第一请求可以为SN恢复请求,第一消息可以为SN恢复拒绝消息。As an example, the first request may be an SN recovery request, and the first message may be an SN recovery rejection message.
因此,在终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,当SN在接收到主基站发送的SN恢复请求时,可以向MN发送SN恢复拒绝消息,来通知SN不能继续为终端设备服务。Therefore, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request sent by the primary base station, it can send an SN recovery rejection message to the MN to notify SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一消息中包括原因值,所述原因值用于标识所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first message includes a cause value, and the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station cannot restore the service to the terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一资源包括以下至少一种:With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the first resource includes at least one of the following:
所述辅基站为所述终端设备分配或预留的资源、所述辅基站保留的所述终端设备的上下文、所述辅基站与主基站之间的接口上的所述终端设备专用的控制面连接和用户面连接、辅基站与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接。The resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station for the terminal device, the context of the terminal device reserved by the secondary base station, and the dedicated control plane of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station and the primary base station Connection and user plane connection, the dedicated user plane connection of the terminal device between the secondary base station and the core network.
其中,辅基站SN为该终端设备分配或预留的资源,例如可以为空口传输资源、NG-U接口传输资源、辅基站与主基站的Xn接口用户面传输资源、辅基站与主基站的Xn接口控制面传输资源中的至少一种。Among them, the resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device may be, for example, air interface transmission resources, NG-U interface transmission resources, Xn interface user plane transmission resources between the secondary base station and the primary base station, and Xn between the secondary base station and the primary base station. At least one of the interface control plane transmission resources.
辅基站SN与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,例如可以包括传输层信息(transport layer information),数据传输通道,辅基站SN为终端设备分配的NG-U传输层地址信息,核心网为终端设备分配的NG-U传输层地址信息中的至少一种。The dedicated user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network for the terminal device may include, for example, transport layer information (transport layer information), data transmission channel, and NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device. At least one of the NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the core network to the terminal device.
辅基站SN和主基站MN的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接,例如可以包括传输层信息、流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocol,SCTP)连接、主基站MN为终端设备分配的UE XnAP ID,辅基站为终端设备分配的UE XnAP ID中的至少一种。作为示例,辅基站SN和主基站MN的接口可以为Xn接口。The dedicated control plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN, for example, may include transport layer information, stream control transmission protocol (SCTP) connection, and UE allocated by the primary base station MN to the terminal device XnAP ID, at least one of the UE XnAP IDs allocated by the secondary base station to the terminal device. As an example, the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN may be an Xn interface.
辅基站SN和主基站MN的接口上的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,例如可以为传输层信息,数据传输通道,辅基站SN为终端设备分配的Xn-U传输层地址信息,主基站MN为终端设备分配的Xn-U传输层地址信息中的至少一种。The dedicated user plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN, for example, can be the transmission layer information, the data transmission channel, the Xn-U transmission layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device, the primary base station MN At least one of the Xn-U transport layer address information allocated to the terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,还包括:In combination with the first aspect, some implementations of the first aspect further include:
所述辅基站向所述主基站发送保留的所述终端设备的上下文。The secondary base station sends the reserved context of the terminal device to the primary base station.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述上下文包括以下信息中的至少一种:With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the context includes at least one of the following information:
所述辅基站承载的服务质量QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,辅小区组SCG配置,所述辅基站承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,所述辅基站承载的所述PDCP上下文,所述辅基站承载的分组数据单元PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果,所述辅基站SN承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的SDAP的配置。The mapping relationship between the quality of service QoS flow carried by the secondary base station and the data radio bearer DRB, the secondary cell group SCG configuration, the configuration of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP carried by the secondary base station, and the PDCP context carried by the secondary base station, The security indication and security result of the packet data unit PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station, and the configuration of the SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN.
可选的,终端设备的上下文还可以包括辅基站SN与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,辅基站SN和主基站MN的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接和用户面连接等中的至少一种。Optionally, the context of the terminal device may also include the terminal device-specific user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, and the terminal device-specific control plane connection and user on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN. At least one of surface connection.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述辅基站确定释放保留的第一资源,包括:With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the determination by the secondary base station to release the reserved first resource includes:
所述辅基站基于所述辅基站的自身负载确定释放所述第一资源。The secondary base station determines to release the first resource based on its own load of the secondary base station.
作为示例,辅基站SN可以根据自身负载,确定是否释放第一资源。一种可能的情况,辅基站SN可以在负载过重导致不能继续为终端设备进行服务时,可以确定释放第一资源,或者,辅基站在没有负载过重时,确定不释放第一资源,此时辅基站SN能够继续为终端设备服务,即可以恢复与终端设备的RRC连接。As an example, the secondary base station SN may determine whether to release the first resource according to its own load. In a possible situation, the secondary base station SN may determine to release the first resource when the load is too heavy and it cannot continue to serve the terminal device, or the secondary base station may determine not to release the first resource when the load is not too heavy. The time-assisted base station SN can continue to serve the terminal equipment, that is, it can resume the RRC connection with the terminal equipment.
或者,在一些实施例中,辅基站SN还可以根据其他因素确定是否释放第一资源,本申请实施例对比不作具体限定。Alternatively, in some embodiments, the secondary base station SN may also determine whether to release the first resource according to other factors, which is not specifically limited in comparison with the embodiments of the present application.
第二方面,提供了一种准入控制的方法,包括:In the second aspect, a method of access control is provided, including:
主基站从辅基站接收第一消息,所述第一消息用于通知所述辅基站不能恢复对无线资源控制RRC去激活态的终端设备的服务;The primary base station receives a first message from the secondary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that it cannot resume service to the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state;
所述主基站根据所述第一消息,确定所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。According to the first message, the primary base station determines that the secondary base station cannot resume service to the terminal device.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,当终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备时,辅基站SN可以向主基站MN发送第一消息,来通知辅基站SN不能继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the secondary base station SN may send a first message to the primary base station MN to notify The secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述主基站从辅基站接收第一消息之前,还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, before the primary base station receives the first message from the secondary base station, the method further includes:
所述主基站向所述辅基站发送第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述辅基站恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The primary base station sends a first request to the secondary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
作为示例,第一请求可以为SN恢复请求,第一消息可以为SN恢复拒绝消息。As an example, the first request may be an SN recovery request, and the first message may be an SN recovery rejection message.
因此,在终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,当SN在接收到主基站发送的SN恢复请求时,可以向MN发送SN恢复拒绝消息,来通知SN不能继续为终端设备服务。Therefore, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request sent by the primary base station, it can send an SN recovery rejection message to the MN to notify SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一消息中包括原因值,所述原因值用于标识所述辅基站拒不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the first message includes a cause value, and the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station refuses to restore the service to the terminal device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,还包括:In combination with the second aspect, some implementations of the second aspect further include:
所述主基站从所述辅基站接收所述终端设备的上下文。The primary base station receives the context of the terminal device from the secondary base station.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述上下文包括以下信息中的至少一种:With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the context includes at least one of the following information:
所述辅基站承载的QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,辅小区组SCG配置,所述辅基站承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,所述辅基站承载的所述PDCH上下文,所述辅基站承载的PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果,所述辅基站SN承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的SDAP的配置。The mapping relationship between the QoS flow carried by the secondary base station and the data radio bearer DRB, the secondary cell group SCG configuration, the configuration of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP carried by the secondary base station, the PDCH context carried by the secondary base station, the The security indication and security result of the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station, and the configuration of the SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN.
可选的,终端设备的上下文还可以包括辅基站SN与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,辅基站SN和主基站MN的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接和用户面连接等中的至少一种。Optionally, the context of the terminal device may also include the terminal device-specific user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, and the terminal device-specific control plane connection and user on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN. At least one of surface connection.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,还包括:In combination with the second aspect, some implementations of the second aspect further include:
所述主基站释放保留的第二资源,所述第二资源为所述主基站与所述辅基站的接口上的所述终端设备专用的资源。The primary base station releases a reserved second resource, where the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on an interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
作为示例,第二资源可以包括主基站与辅基站的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接、用户面连接和传输资源中的至少一个。As an example, the second resource may include at least one of a control plane connection, a user plane connection, and a transmission resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,还包括:In combination with the second aspect, some implementations of the second aspect further include:
所述主基站建立用于承载服务质量QoS流/分组数据单元PDU会话的NG-U隧道,其中,在释放所述第二资源之前,所述QoS流/PDU会话承载在所述辅基站的NG-U隧道上。The primary base station establishes an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flow/packet data unit PDU session, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station. -U tunnel.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,还包括:In combination with the second aspect, some implementations of the second aspect further include:
所述主基站向所述终端设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于向所述终端设备通知释放所述辅基站的配置,其中,所述辅基站的配置包括SCG配置、辅基站配置的测量信息、功率配置信息中的至少一种。The primary base station sends a second message to the terminal device, where the second message is used to notify the terminal device to release the configuration of the secondary base station, where the configuration of the secondary base station includes SCG configuration and secondary base station configuration At least one of measurement information and power configuration information.
可选的,所述第二消息为RRC恢复消息,或RRC重配置消息。Optionally, the second message is an RRC recovery message or an RRC reconfiguration message.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,还包括:In combination with the second aspect, some implementations of the second aspect further include:
所述主基站接收所述终端设备发送的第二请求,所述第二请求用于请求所述终端设备由无线资源控制RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。The primary base station receives a second request sent by the terminal device, where the second request is used to request the terminal device to return to the RRC connected state from the radio resource control RRC deactivated state.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第二请求中包括所述辅基站是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于辅助主基站确定是否可以向辅基站发送恢复请求。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the second request includes related information about whether the secondary base station can be restored, and is used to assist the primary base station in determining whether a restoration request can be sent to the secondary base station.
第三方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括:In a third aspect, a terminal device is provided, including:
从主基站接收第二消息,所述第二消息用于向所述终端设备通知释放所述辅基站的配置,其中,所述辅基站的配置包括SCG配置、辅基站配置的测量信息、功率配置信息中的至少一种;A second message is received from the primary base station, where the second message is used to notify the terminal device to release the configuration of the secondary base station, where the configuration of the secondary base station includes SCG configuration, measurement information configured by the secondary base station, and power configuration At least one of the information;
所述终端设备释放所述辅基站的配置。The terminal device releases the configuration of the secondary base station.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,当终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备时,辅基站SN可以向主基站通知辅基站SN不能继续为终端设备服务,从而终端设备释放该辅基站的配置。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the secondary base station SN can notify the primary base station that the secondary base station SN cannot continue to be a terminal Device service, so that the terminal device releases the configuration of the secondary base station. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
第四方面,提供了一种无线通信的装置,该装置可以是辅基站,也可以是该辅基站内的芯片。该装置具有实现上述第一方面及各种可能的实现方式的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fourth aspect, a wireless communication device is provided. The device may be a secondary base station or a chip in the secondary base station. The device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation modes. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置包括:收发模块,可选地,该装置还包括处理模块,所述收发模块例如可以是收发器、接收器、发射器中的至少一种,该收发模块可以包括射频电路或天线。该处理模块可以是处理器。可选地,所述装置还包括存储模块,该存储模块例如可以是存储器。当包括存储模块时,该存储模块用于存储指令。该处理模块与该存储模块连接,该处理模块可以执行该存储模块存储的指令或源自其他的指令,以使该装置执行上述第一方面及各种可能的实现方式的方法。In a possible design, the device includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the device further includes a processing module. The transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter. The transceiver module Can include radio frequency circuits or antennas. The processing module may be a processor. Optionally, the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be a memory, for example. When a storage module is included, the storage module is used to store instructions. The processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute the instructions stored in the storage module or from other instructions, so that the device executes the above-mentioned first aspect and various possible implementation methods.
在另一种可能的设计中,当该装置为芯片时,该芯片包括:收发模块,可选地,该芯 片还包括处理模块,收发模块例如可以是该芯片上的输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。处理模块例如可以是处理器。该处理模块可执行指令,以使该终端内的芯片执行上述第一方面以及任意可能的实现的通信方法。可选地,该处理模块可以执行存储模块中的指令,该存储模块可以为芯片内的存储模块,如寄存器、缓存等。该存储模块还可以是位于通信设备内,但位于芯片外部,如只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)等。In another possible design, when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the chip also includes a processing module. The transceiver module may be, for example, an input/output interface or pin on the chip. Or circuits, etc. The processing module may be a processor, for example. The processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal executes the first aspect and any possible implementation communication methods. Optionally, the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like. The storage module may also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory) memory, RAM) etc.
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个通用中央处理器(CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制上述第一方面及各种可能的实现方式的方法的程序执行的集成电路。Among them, the processor mentioned in any of the above can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more for controlling the above The integrated circuit of the program execution of the method of the first aspect and various possible implementation modes.
第五方面,提供了一种无线通信的装置,该装置可以是主基站,也可以是该主基站内的芯片。该装置具有实现上述第二方面及各种可能的实现方式的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fifth aspect, a wireless communication device is provided. The device may be a main base station or a chip in the main base station. The device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned second aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置包括:收发模块,可选地,该装置还包括处理模块,所述收发模块例如可以是收发器、接收器、发射器中的至少一种,该收发模块可以包括射频电路或天线。该处理模块可以是处理器。可选地,所述装置还包括存储模块,该存储模块例如可以是存储器。当包括存储模块时,该存储模块用于存储指令。该处理模块与该存储模块连接,该处理模块可以执行该存储模块存储的指令或源自其他的指令,以使该装置执行上述第二方面及各种可能的实现方式的通信方法。In a possible design, the device includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the device further includes a processing module. The transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter. The transceiver module Can include radio frequency circuits or antennas. The processing module may be a processor. Optionally, the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be a memory, for example. When a storage module is included, the storage module is used to store instructions. The processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute instructions stored in the storage module or from other instructions, so that the device executes the communication methods of the second aspect and various possible implementation manners.
在另一种可能的设计中,当该装置为芯片时,该芯片包括:收发模块,可选地,该装置还包括处理模块,收发模块例如可以是该芯片上的输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。处理模块例如可以是处理器。该处理模块可执行指令,以使该终端内的芯片执行上述第二方面以及任意可能的实现的方法。可选地,该处理模块可以执行存储模块中的指令,该存储模块可以为芯片内的存储模块,如寄存器、缓存等。该存储模块还可以是位于通信设备内,但位于芯片外部,如只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)等。In another possible design, when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the device also includes a processing module. The transceiver module may be, for example, an input/output interface or pin on the chip. Or circuits, etc. The processing module may be a processor, for example. The processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal executes the second aspect and any possible implementation methods. Optionally, the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like. The storage module may also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory) memory, RAM) etc.
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个通用中央处理器(CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制上述第二方面及各种可能的实现方式的程序执行的集成电路。Among them, the processor mentioned in any of the above can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more for controlling the above The second aspect and various possible implementations are integrated circuits for program execution.
第六方面,提供了一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有程序代码,该程序代码用于指示执行上述第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In a sixth aspect, a computer storage medium is provided, and program code is stored in the computer storage medium, and the program code is used to instruct the execution of the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, or any of the possible implementations thereof. Method of instruction.
第七方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, or the third aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
第八方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括具有实现上述第一方面的各方法及各种可能设计的功能的装置和上述具有实现上述第二方面的各方法及各种可能设计的功能的装置。进一步的,该通信系统中还可以包括前述的终端设备。In an eighth aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes a device capable of implementing the methods and various possible designs of the foregoing first aspect, and the foregoing device capable of implementing the various methods and various possible designs of the foregoing second aspect. Functional device. Further, the communication system may also include the aforementioned terminal equipment.
第九方面,提供了一种处理器,用于与存储器耦合,用于执行上述第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a processor is provided, configured to be coupled with a memory, and configured to execute the method in the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, or any possible implementation manners thereof.
第十方面,提供了一种芯片,芯片包括处理器和通信接口,该通信接口用于与外部器件或内部器件进行通信,该处理器用于实现上述第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a chip is provided. The chip includes a processor and a communication interface. The communication interface is used to communicate with an external device or an internal device. The processor is used to implement the above-mentioned first or second or third aspects or The method in any possible implementation.
可选地,该芯片还可以包括存储器,该存储器中存储有指令,处理器用于执行存储器中存储的指令或源于其他的指令。当该指令被执行时,处理器用于实现上述第一方面或第二方面或第三方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。Optionally, the chip may further include a memory in which instructions are stored, and the processor is configured to execute instructions stored in the memory or instructions derived from other sources. When the instruction is executed, the processor is used to implement the method in the foregoing first aspect, second aspect, third aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
可选地,该芯片可以集成在主基站或辅基站上。Optionally, the chip can be integrated on the primary base station or the secondary base station.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1示出了应用本申请实施例的一种网络架构的示意图。Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied.
图2示出了本申请实施例提供的一种网络架构的示意图。Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图3示出了适用于本申请实施例的网络架构的又一示意图。FIG. 3 shows another schematic diagram of a network architecture applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
图4示出了应用本申请实施例一种网络架构的示意图。Fig. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
图5示出了应用本申请实施例另一种网络架构的示意图。Fig. 5 shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
图6示出了应用本申请实施例另一种网络架构的示意图。Fig. 6 shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
图7示出了应用本申请实施例另一种网络架构的示意图。Fig. 7 shows a schematic diagram of another network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application.
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 8 shows a schematic flowchart of an admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图9示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 9 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 10 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图11示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图12示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 12 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图13示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 13 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图14示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 14 shows a schematic flowchart of another method for admission control provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图15示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 15 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图16示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 16 shows a schematic flowchart of another admission control method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图17示出了本申请实施例提供的一种无线通信的装置的示意图。Fig. 17 shows a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图18示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种无线通信的装置的示意图。FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of another wireless communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图19示出了本申请提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图。FIG. 19 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by this application.
图20示出了本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图。FIG. 20 shows a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex) , TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), the future 5th generation (5G) system or new radio (NR), etc.
本申请实施例中的终端设备也可以称为:用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、接入终端、用户单元、用户 站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of this application may also be called: user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), access terminal, user unit, user station, Mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
终端设备可以是一种向用户提供语音/数据连通性的设备,例如,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal device may be a device that provides voice/data connectivity to users, for example, a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, and so on. At present, some examples of terminals are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets, notebook computers, palmtop computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices, virtual reality (VR) devices, and augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical surgery, and smart grid (smart grid) Wireless terminals, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocols , SIP) phone, wireless local loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), handheld device with wireless communication function, computing device or other processing device connected to wireless modem, vehicle Devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network or terminal devices in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as various smart bracelets and smart jewelry for physical sign monitoring.
此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以是物联网(internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备,IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。In addition, in the embodiments of this application, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in the Internet of Things (IoT) system. The IoT is an important part of the development of information technology in the future. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. Connect with the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and interconnection of things.
另外,本申请实施例中的接入设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该接入设备也可以称为接入网设备或无线接入网设备,可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该接入设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的接入设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的接入设备等,可以是WLAN中的接入点(access point,AP),可以是新型无线系统(new radio,NR)系统中的gNB本申请实施例并不限定。In addition, the access device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device used to communicate with a terminal device. The access device may also be called an access network device or a radio access network device, and may be an evolved base station in an LTE system. (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), it can also be a wireless controller in the cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario, or the access device can be a relay station, access point, vehicle-mounted device, or wearable The equipment and the access equipment in the future 5G network or the access equipment in the future evolved PLMN network can be an access point (AP) in a WLAN, or a new radio system (NR) system The gNB in the embodiment of this application is not limited.
另外,在本申请实施例中,接入设备是RAN中的设备,或者说,是将终端设备接入到无线网络的RAN节点。例如,作为示例而非限定,作为接入设备,可以列举:gNB、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(base band unit,BBU), 或无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wifi)接入点(access point,AP)等。在一种网络结构中,网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点、或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备、或者控制面CU节点(CU-CP节点)和用户面CU节点(CU-UP节点)以及DU节点的RAN设备。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the access device is a device in the RAN, or in other words, a RAN node that connects a terminal device to a wireless network. For example, as an example and not a limitation, as an access device, one can enumerate: gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), Base Station Controller (BSC), Base Transceiver Station (BTS), Home Base Station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB) , Baseband unit (BBU), or wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wifi) access point (AP), etc. In a network structure, a network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node, or a distributed unit (DU) node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node, or a control plane CU node (CU). -CP node), user plane CU node (CU-UP node) and RAN equipment of DU node.
接入设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与接入设备进行通信,该小区可以是接入设备(例如基站)对应的小区,小区可以属于宏基站,也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。The access device provides services for the cell, and the terminal device communicates with the access device through the transmission resources (for example, frequency domain resources, or spectrum resources) used by the cell, and the cell may be corresponding to the access device (for example, a base station) A cell. A cell can belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell. The small cell here can include: metro cell, micro cell, pico cell, and micro cell. Femto cells, etc., these small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
此外,LTE系统或5G系统中的载波上可以同时有多个小区同频工作,在某些特殊场景下,也可以认为上述载波与小区的概念等同。例如在载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)场景下,当为终端设备配置辅载波时,会同时携带辅载波的载波索引和工作在该辅载波的辅小区的小区标识(cell indentification,Cell ID),在这种情况下,可以认为载波与小区的概念等同,比如终端设备接入一个载波和接入一个小区是等同的。In addition, the carrier in the LTE system or the 5G system can have multiple cells working at the same frequency at the same time. In some special scenarios, the concept of the above-mentioned carrier and the cell can also be considered equivalent. For example, in a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, when a secondary carrier is configured for a terminal device, the carrier index of the secondary carrier and the cell identification (Cell ID) of the secondary cell working on the secondary carrier will be carried at the same time. In this case, the concept of carrier and cell can be regarded as equivalent. For example, the terminal equipment accessing a carrier is equivalent to accessing a cell.
图1示出了应用本申请实施例的一种网络架构的示意图。如图1所示,终端设备可以同时与两个接入设备进行双链接(dual-connectivity,DC)。该两个接入设备之中,负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息,并负责和核心网控制平面实体交互的该接入设备为主基站(master node,MN),另一个无线接入设备则为辅基站(secondary node,SN)。Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture to which an embodiment of the present application is applied. As shown in Figure 1, the terminal device can simultaneously perform dual-connectivity (DC) with two access devices. Among the two access devices, the access device that is responsible for interacting with the terminal device for radio resource control messages and interacting with the core network control plane entity is the master node (MN), and the other wireless access device It is a secondary base station (secondary node, SN).
类似的,终端设备也可以同时与多个接入设备存在通信连接并可收发数据,可以称之为多连接或者多链接(multi-connectivity,MC),该多个接入设备之中,可以有一个接入设备负责与该终端设备交互无线资源控制消息,并负责和核心网控制平面实体交互,那么,该接入设备可以称之为MN,则其余的接入设备可以称之为SN。Similarly, the terminal device can also have a communication connection with multiple access devices at the same time and can send and receive data, which can be called multi-connectivity or multi-connectivity (MC). Among the multiple access devices, there can be An access device is responsible for interacting radio resource control messages with the terminal device, and is responsible for interaction with the core network control plane entity. Then, the access device can be called MN, and the other access devices can be called SN.
本申请实施例中,MN和SN可以为相同无线接入类型(radio access type,RAT)的基站,也可以是不同RAT的基站。In the embodiment of this application, the MN and the SN may be base stations of the same radio access type (RAT), or may be base stations of different RATs.
图2示出了本申请实施例提供的一种网络架构的示意图。如图2所示,接入设备和终端设备之间的通信遵循一定的协议层结构。例如控制面协议层结构可以包括无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理层等协议层的功能。用户面协议层结构可以包括PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层和物理层等协议层的功能;在一种实现中,PDCP层之上还可以包括业务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol,SDAP)层。Fig. 2 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, the communication between the access device and the terminal device follows a certain protocol layer structure. For example, the control plane protocol layer structure may include the radio resource control (RRC) layer, the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, the radio link control (RLC) layer, and the media interface. Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical layer and other protocol layer functions. The user plane protocol layer structure may include the functions of the PDCP layer, the RLC layer, the MAC layer, and the physical layer; in one implementation, the PDCP layer may also include the service data adaptation protocol (SDAP) Floor.
这些协议层的功能可以由一个节点实现,或者可以由多个节点实现;例如,在一种演进结构中,接入设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布单元(distributed unit,DU),多个DU可以由一个CU集中控制。The functions of these protocol layers can be implemented by one node or multiple nodes; for example, in an evolution structure, the access device can include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU) , Multiple DUs can be centrally controlled by one CU.
如图2所示,CU和DU可以根据无线网络的协议层划分,例如PDCP层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP以下的协议层,例如RLC层和MAC层等的功能设置在DU。或者说,CU具有PDCP层以上(含PDCP、RRC和SDAP)功能,DU具有PDCP层以下(含RLC、MAC和PHY)功能。As shown in Figure 2, CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layers of the wireless network. For example, the functions of the PDCP layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the protocol layers below the PDCP, such as the RLC layer and MAC layer, are set in the DU. In other words, the CU has functions above the PDCP layer (including PDCP, RRC, and SDAP), and the DU has functions below the PDCP layer (including RLC, MAC, and PHY).
这种协议层的划分仅仅是一种举例,还可以在其它协议层划分,例如在RLC层划分,将RLC层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,RLC层以下协议层的功能设置在DU;或者,在某个协议层中划分,例如将RLC层的部分功能和RLC层以上的协议层的功能设置在CU,将RLC层的剩余功能和RLC层以下的协议层的功能设置在DU。此外,也可以按其它方式划分,例如按时延划分,将处理时间需要满足时延要求的功能设置在DU,不需要满足该时延要求的功能设置在CU。This type of protocol layer division is just an example, it can also be divided in other protocol layers, for example, in the RLC layer, the functions of the RLC layer and above protocol layers are set in the CU, and the functions of the protocol layers below the RLC layer are set in the DU; Or, in a certain protocol layer, for example, part of the functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer above the RLC layer are set in the CU, and the remaining functions of the RLC layer and the functions of the protocol layer below the RLC layer are set in the DU. In addition, it can also be divided in other ways, for example, by time delay, and functions that need to meet the delay requirement for processing time are set in the DU, and functions that do not need to meet the delay requirement are set in the CU.
图3示出了适用于本申请实施例的网络架构的又一示意图。相对于图2所示的架构,还可以将CU的控制面(CP)和用户面(UP)分离,分成不同实体来实现,分别为控制面CU实体(CU-CP实体)和用户面CU实体(CU-UP实体)。FIG. 3 shows another schematic diagram of a network architecture applicable to the embodiments of the present application. Compared with the architecture shown in Figure 2, the control plane (CP) and the user plane (UP) of the CU can also be separated and realized by dividing them into different entities, namely the control plane CU entity (CU-CP entity) and the user plane CU entity (CU-UP entity).
在以上网络架构中,CU产生的信令可以通过DU发送给终端设备,或者终端设备产生的信令可以通过DU发送给CU。DU可以不对该信令进行解析而直接通过协议层封装而透传给终端设备或CU。以下实施例中如果涉及这种信令在DU和终端设备之间的传输,此时,DU对信令的发送或接收包括这种场景。In the above network architecture, the signaling generated by the CU can be sent to the terminal device through the DU, or the signaling generated by the terminal device can be sent to the CU through the DU. The DU can directly pass the protocol layer encapsulation without analyzing the signaling and transparently transmit it to the terminal device or CU. If the following embodiments involve the transmission of such signaling between the DU and the terminal device, at this time, the sending or receiving of the signaling by the DU includes this scenario.
在以上实施例中CU划分为接入网RAN侧的网络设备,此外,也可以将CU划分为核心网CN侧的网络设备,在此不做限制。In the above embodiment, the CU is divided into network equipment on the RAN side of the access network. In addition, the CU may also be divided into network equipment on the CN side of the core network, which is not limited here.
本申请以下实施例中的装置,根据其实现的功能,可以位于终端设备或网络设备。当采用以上CU-DU的结构时,接入设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的RAN设备。The devices in the following embodiments of the present application may be located in terminal equipment or network equipment according to their realized functions. When the above CU-DU structure is adopted, the access device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a RAN device including a CU node and a DU node.
图4示出了应用本申请实施例一种网络架构的示意图。该网络架构为5G无线通信系统。如图4所示,该5G无线通信系统(也称为5G system,5GS,5G系统等)的总体架构由5G核心网(也称为5G Core,5GCN,5GC)和NG-RAN(也称为5G-RAN)组成。其中,5GC为5G无线通信系统的核心网,NG-RAN为5G无线通信系统的无线接入网。Fig. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture applying an embodiment of the present application. The network architecture is a 5G wireless communication system. As shown in Figure 4, the overall architecture of the 5G wireless communication system (also known as 5G system, 5GS, 5G system, etc.) consists of 5G core network (also known as 5G Core, 5GCN, 5GC) and NG-RAN (also known as 5G-RAN) composition. Among them, 5GC is the core network of the 5G wireless communication system, and NG-RAN is the wireless access network of the 5G wireless communication system.
具体的,如图4所示,NG-RAN中包括两类RAN节点(RAN node),分别为gNB和ng-eNB。其中,gNB为终端设备提供新空口(new radio,NR)的用户面和控制面协议栈的终结点(Terminations)。ng-eNB为终端设备提供演进的全球陆地无线接入(evolved universal terrestrial radio access,E-UTRA)用户面和控制面协议栈的终结点。其中,5GC中的核心网设备与NG-RAN中的接入设备(例如gNB,ng-eNB)之间通过NG接口进行数据传输。gNB与gNB之间,gNB与ng-eNB之间,ng-eNB与ng-eNB之间均可以通过Xn接口进行数据传输。Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, NG-RAN includes two types of RAN nodes (RAN nodes), namely gNB and ng-eNB. Among them, the gNB provides terminal devices with new radio (NR) user plane and control plane protocol stack terminations (Terminations). The ng-eNB provides terminal equipment with an evolved universal terrestrial radio access (evolved universal terrestrial radio access, E-UTRA) user plane and control plane protocol stack termination point. Among them, the core network equipment in the 5GC and the access equipment in the NG-RAN (for example, gNB, ng-eNB) perform data transmission through the NG interface. The Xn interface can be used for data transmission between gNB and gNB, between gNB and ng-eNB, and between ng-eNB and ng-eNB.
需要说明的是,图4中示例性的示出了网络架构的示意图,但本申请实施例并不限制于此。例如该5GC中还可以包括更多的核心网设备,NG-RAN中还可以包括其他接入技术的基站等。It should be noted that FIG. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture, but the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the 5GC may also include more core network equipment, and the NG-RAN may also include base stations of other access technologies.
在图4所示的5G无线通信系统中定义了以下3种具体的多无线接入类型双连接(multiple RATs dual connectivity,MR-DC)架构:In the 5G wireless communication system shown in Figure 4, the following three specific multi-radio access types dual connectivity (multiple RATs dual connectivity, MR-DC) architecture are defined:
1)E-UTRA NR DC(简称为EN-DC)架构1) E-UTRA NR DC (referred to as EN-DC) architecture
该架构也可以称为选择(option)3系列。如图5所示,即LTE基站(比如LTE eNB)作为主站MN,NR基站(比如gNB)作为辅站SN进行DC,并且核心网设备为EPC。This architecture can also be called option 3 series. As shown in FIG. 5, an LTE base station (such as LTE eNB) serves as the primary station MN, an NR base station (such as gNB) serves as a secondary station SN for DC, and the core network equipment is EPC.
在图5中(a)所示的实现方式中,LTE eNB通过S1-C接口或S1-U接口连接到EPC,为终端设备与EPC之间的数据提供空口传输资源。In the implementation shown in Figure 5(a), the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface, and provides air interface transmission resources for data between the terminal device and the EPC.
在图5中(b)所示的实现方式中,LTE eNB通过S1-C接口或S1-U接口连接到EPC,gNB通过S1-U接口连接到EPC,为终端设备与EPC之间的数据传输提供空口传输资源。In the implementation shown in Figure 5(b), the LTE eNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-C interface or the S1-U interface, and the gNB is connected to the EPC through the S1-U interface, which is the data transmission between the terminal equipment and the EPC Provide air interface transmission resources.
2)NR E-UTRA DC(简称NE-DC)架构2) NR E-UTRA DC (NE-DC for short) architecture
该架构也可以称为option 4系列。如图6所示,即NR基站(比如gNB)作为主站MN,LTE基站(比如ng eNB)作为辅站SN进行DC,并且核心网设备为5GC。This architecture can also be called option 4 series. As shown in Figure 6, the NR base station (such as gNB) serves as the primary station MN, the LTE base station (such as ng eNB) serves as the secondary station SN for DC, and the core network equipment is 5GC.
在图6中(a)所示的实现方式中,gNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源。In the implementation shown in Figure 6(a), the gNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-C interface or the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between the terminal device and the 5GC.
在图6中(b)所示的实现方式中,gNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,ng-eNB通过NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源。In the implementation shown in Figure 6(b), gNB is connected to 5GC through NG-C interface or NG-U interface, ng-eNB is connected to 5GC through NG-U interface, providing data transmission between terminal equipment and 5GC Air interface transmission resources.
3)下一代E-UTRA NR DC(Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC,简称NG NE-DC)架构3) Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC (Next Generation E-UTRA NR DC, NG NE-DC for short) architecture
该架构也可以称为option 7系列。如图7所示,即LTE基站(比如ng-gNB)作为主站MN,NR基站(比如gNB)作为辅站SN进行DC,并且核心网设备为5GC。This architecture can also be called option 7 series. As shown in Figure 7, the LTE base station (such as ng-gNB) serves as the primary station MN, the NR base station (such as gNB) serves as the secondary station SN for DC, and the core network equipment is 5GC.
在图7中(a)所示的实现方式中,ng-eNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源。In the implementation shown in Fig. 7(a), the ng-eNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-C interface or the NG-U interface to provide air interface transmission resources for data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC.
在图7中(b)所示的实现方式中,ng-eNB通过NG-C接口或NG-U接口连接到5GC,gNB通过NG-U接口连接到5GC,为终端设备与5GC的数据传输提供空口传输资源。In the implementation shown in Figure 7 (b), the ng-eNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-C interface or the NG-U interface, and the gNB is connected to the 5GC through the NG-U interface to provide data transmission between the terminal equipment and the 5GC. Air interface transmission resources.
此外,MN和SN也可以是相同制式的无线接入设备,例如MN和SN均为NR基站或均为LTE基站。需要说明的是,在图5至图7所示的网络架构中,主站MN和辅站SN之间可以通过有线连接或无线连接进行数据传输,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In addition, MN and SN may also be wireless access devices of the same standard. For example, MN and SN are both NR base stations or both LTE base stations. It should be noted that in the network architectures shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the primary station MN and the secondary station SN may perform data transmission through a wired connection or a wireless connection, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
本申请实施例中,由于终端设备在一个基站下可以同时接收多个小区的服务,因此主基站MN也可以称为主小区组(master cell group,MCG)。类似的,辅基站SN也可以称为辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG)。In the embodiment of the present application, since the terminal device can simultaneously receive services of multiple cells under one base station, the master base station MN may also be referred to as a master cell group (MCG). Similarly, the secondary base station SN may also be referred to as a secondary cell group (SCG).
下面,对本申请中的涉及RRC连接状态进行说明。The following describes the RRC connection state in this application.
RRC连接状态包括三种,分别为RRC空闲(idle)态、RRC连接(connected)态,以及RRC去激活(inactive)态。There are three RRC connection states, namely RRC idle state, RRC connected state, and RRC inactive state.
在RRC空闲态时,终端设备删除终端设备的上下文,但是核心网设备具有该终端设备的上下文,接入设备没有该终端设备的上下文。同时,核心网设备与接入设备之间也没有终端设备专用的信令连接,例如终端设备相关的NG连接,或者UE相关的S1连接(UE associated S1 connection)。本申请实施例中,终端设备的上下文例如为终端设备的接入层(access stratum,AS)上下文,本申请实施例对此不作限定。In the RRC idle state, the terminal device deletes the context of the terminal device, but the core network device has the context of the terminal device, and the access device does not have the context of the terminal device. At the same time, there is no dedicated signaling connection for terminal equipment between the core network equipment and the access equipment, such as the NG connection related to the terminal equipment, or the UE-related S1 connection (UE associated S1 connection). In the embodiment of the present application, the context of the terminal device is, for example, the access stratum (AS) context of the terminal device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
当有下行数据到达时,核心网设备会在该终端设备的跟踪区(tracking area,TA)发起对该终端设备的寻呼(paging)。其中,跟踪区也可以称为寻呼区。然后,终端设备通过监听寻呼信道获知是否需要转换到RRC连接态进行下行数据的接收。When downlink data arrives, the core network device will initiate a paging (paging) for the terminal device in the tracking area (TA) of the terminal device. Among them, the tracking area can also be called a paging area. Then, the terminal device learns whether it needs to switch to the RRC connected state to receive downlink data by monitoring the paging channel.
当有上行数据发送时,终端设备会主动触发进入RRC连接态,从而进行数据发送。When there is uplink data to be sent, the terminal device will actively trigger to enter the RRC connected state to send data.
另外,终端设备在RRC空闲态移动时,当跨跟踪区TA时,需要进行位置区域更新(tracking area update,TAU)。In addition, when the terminal device moves in the RRC idle state, when it crosses the tracking area TA, a location area update (tracking area update, TAU) is required.
终端设备在RRC连接态时,核心网设备和接入设备均有该终端设备的上下文。并且,终端设备与接入设备之间维持RRC连接,终端设备可以进行数据的上下行传输。When the terminal device is in the RRC connected state, the core network device and the access device have the context of the terminal device. In addition, the RRC connection is maintained between the terminal device and the access device, and the terminal device can perform uplink and downlink transmission of data.
终端设备在RRC去激活态时,终端设备和接入设备存储该终端设备的AS上下文,核心网设备也具有终端设备上下文。并且,核心网设备和接入设备之间有终端设备专用的信令连接,例如UE相关的NG连接(UE associated NG connection)。但是终端设备和接入设备不需要维护RRC连接。本申请实施例中,RRC去激活态也可以称为RRC去激活态。When the terminal device is in the RRC deactivated state, the terminal device and the access device store the AS context of the terminal device, and the core network device also has the terminal device context. In addition, there is a dedicated signaling connection for terminal equipment between the core network equipment and the access equipment, such as a UE-associated NG connection (UE associated NG connection). But terminal equipment and access equipment do not need to maintain RRC connections. In the embodiments of this application, the RRC deactivated state may also be referred to as the RRC deactivated state.
当有下行数据到达时,接入设备可以发起寻呼,寻呼区域可以为空闲态的寻呼区(tracking area,TA),或者为基于RAN寻呼区(RAN-based notification area,RNA)。当终端设备在RRC去激活态移动时,跨寻呼区需要进行位置更新,例如TAU或基于RAN寻呼区更新(RAN-based notification area update,RNAU)。When downlink data arrives, the access device can initiate a paging, and the paging area can be an idle paging area (tracking area, TA) or a RAN-based notification area (RNA). When the terminal device moves in the RRC deactivated state, location updates are required across paging areas, such as TAU or RAN-based notification area update (RNAU).
可以看出,对于核心网设备来说,去激活的终端设备与连接态终端设备类似,对于接入设备来说,去激活态终端设备与空闲态终端设备类似,没有实时的RRC连接和数据发送,需要通过寻呼为终端设备发送下行数据。对于去激活态,由于核心网设备与接入设备之间的专用连接没有释放,接入设备侧储存了终端设备的AS上下文,可以加快终端设备恢复到连接态的速度,快速进行数据传输。It can be seen that for the core network equipment, the deactivated terminal equipment is similar to the connected terminal equipment. For the access equipment, the deactivated terminal equipment is similar to the idle state terminal equipment. There is no real-time RRC connection and data transmission. , Need to send downlink data for the terminal device through paging. For the deactivated state, since the dedicated connection between the core network device and the access device is not released, the AS context of the terminal device is stored on the access device side, which can speed up the recovery of the terminal device to the connected state and quickly perform data transmission.
需要说明的是,对于图6中的NE-DC架构,图7中的NG EN-DC架构以及MN和SN均为NR基站的DC架构而言,由于其中的基站均属于NG-RAN,且与5GC相连,因此当终端设备在NE-DC、NG EN-DC以及NR-NR DC架构下,可以支持RRC去激活态,即RRC去激活态。It should be noted that for the NE-DC architecture in Figure 6, the NG EN-DC architecture in Figure 7 and the DC architecture where MN and SN are both NR base stations, since the base stations are all NG-RAN and are not The 5GC is connected, so when the terminal device is in the NE-DC, NG EN-DC, and NR-NR DC architecture, it can support the RRC deactivated state, that is, the RRC deactivated state.
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的准入控制的方法和装置。The method and device for admission control provided by this application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本申请的技术方案可以应用于无线通信系统中,处于无线通信系统中的通信装置之间可具有无线通信连接关系。该通信装置中的一个例如可以为第一接入设备(例如主基站MN),或者配置于第一接入设备(例如主基站MN)中的芯片,该通信装置中的另一个例如可以为第二接入设备(例如辅基站SN)或者配置于第二接入设备(例如辅基站SN)中的芯片。另外,该通信装置中还包括终端设备,该终端设备支持RRC去激活态。The technical solution of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system, and communication devices in the wireless communication system can have a wireless communication connection relationship. One of the communication devices may be, for example, the first access device (for example, the main base station MN), or a chip configured in the first access device (for example, the main base station MN), and the other of the communication devices may be, for example, the The second access device (for example, the secondary base station SN) or a chip configured in the second access device (for example, the secondary base station SN). In addition, the communication device also includes a terminal device, and the terminal device supports an RRC deactivated state.
下面,将结合图8至图14,以第一接入设备为主基站MN,第二接入设备为辅基站SN为例进行描述。对于主基站MN中的芯片,辅基站SN中的芯片的实现方法,可以参考主基站MN和辅基站SN的具体说明,不作重复介绍。In the following, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 8 to 14, taking the first access device as the primary base station MN and the second access device as the secondary base station SN as examples. For the implementation method of the chip in the primary base station MN and the chip in the secondary base station SN, reference may be made to the specific description of the primary base station MN and the secondary base station SN, and no repeated introduction will be made.
图8是从设备交互的角度示出的准入控制的方法的示意性流程图。如图8所示,该准入控制的方法可以包括步骤110至130。FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of an admission control method shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 8, the admission control method may include steps 110 to 130.
110,辅基站确定释放为无线资源控制RRC去激活态的终端设备保留的第一资源。其中,该第一资源为专用于该终端设备的资源。110. The secondary base station determines to release the first resource reserved for the terminal device in the radio resource control RRC deactivated state. Wherein, the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
一种可能的方式中,在主基站将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态时,主基站MN可以请求挂起辅基站SN。挂起的辅基站SN可以为该RRC去激活态的终端设备保留资源,即上述第一资源。本申请实施例中,保留可以指预留,或者保存。In a possible manner, when the primary base station configures the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state, the primary base station MN may request to suspend the secondary base station SN. The suspended secondary base station SN may reserve resources for the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state, that is, the above-mentioned first resource. In the embodiments of this application, reservation may refer to reservation or preservation.
需要说明的是,在辅基站执行步骤110,即确定释放为该RRC去激活态的终端设备保留的第一资源的时刻,终端设备可以处于RRC去激活态,或者也可能由RRC去激活态转为其他连接状态,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It should be noted that at the moment when the secondary base station performs step 110, that is, when it determines to release the first resource reserved for the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state, the terminal device may be in the RRC deactivated state, or may be transferred from the RRC deactivated state. For other connection states, this embodiment of the application does not limit this.
作为示例,第一资源可以包括以下信息中的至少一种:As an example, the first resource may include at least one of the following information:
辅基站SN为该终端设备分配或预留的资源,辅基站SN保留的该终端设备的上下文, 辅基站SN与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,辅基站SN和主基站MN之间的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接和用户面连接等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station SN for the terminal equipment, the context of the terminal equipment reserved by the secondary base station SN, the dedicated user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN The dedicated control plane connection and user plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the terminals are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,辅基站SN为该终端设备分配或预留的资源,例如可以为空口传输资源、NG-U接口传输资源、辅基站与主基站之间的Xn接口用户面传输资源、辅基站与主基站之间的Xn接口控制面传输资源中的至少一种。Among them, the resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station SN for the terminal equipment may be, for example, air interface transmission resources, NG-U interface transmission resources, Xn interface user plane transmission resources between the secondary base station and the primary base station, and the secondary base station and the primary base station At least one of the Xn interface control plane transmission resources between.
辅基站SN与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,例如可以包括传输层信息(transport layer information),数据传输通道,辅基站SN为终端设备分配的NG-U传输层地址信息,核心网为终端设备分配的NG-U传输层地址信息中的至少一种。The dedicated user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network for the terminal device may include, for example, transport layer information (transport layer information), data transmission channel, and NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device. At least one of the NG-U transport layer address information allocated by the core network to the terminal device.
辅基站SN和主基站MN之间的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接,例如可以包括传输层信息、流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocol,SCTP)连接、主基站MN为终端设备分配的UE XnAP ID,辅基站为终端设备分配的UE XnAP ID中的至少一种。作为示例,辅基站SN和主基站MN之间的接口可以为Xn接口。The dedicated control plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN, for example, may include transport layer information, stream control transmission protocol (SCTP) connection, and the primary base station MN allocates terminal equipment At least one of the UE XnAP ID of the UE XnAP ID assigned by the secondary base station to the terminal device. As an example, the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN may be an Xn interface.
辅基站SN和主基站MN之间的接口上的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,例如可以为传输层信息,数据传输通道,辅基站SN为终端设备分配的Xn-U传输层地址信息,主基站MN为终端设备分配的Xn-U传输层地址信息中的至少一种。其中,传输层地址信息可以包含IP地址、端口号、GTP隧道标识中的至少一种。The dedicated user plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN, for example, can be the transmission layer information, the data transmission channel, the Xn-U transmission layer address information allocated by the secondary base station SN for the terminal device, the primary At least one of the Xn-U transport layer address information allocated by the base station MN to the terminal device. Wherein, the transport layer address information may include at least one of IP address, port number, and GTP tunnel identifier.
可选的,辅基站SN保存的该终端设备的上下文,例如为AS上下文,可以包括以下信息中的至少一种:Optionally, the context of the terminal device stored by the secondary base station SN, for example, the AS context, may include at least one of the following information:
辅基站SN承载的PDU session/QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,辅小区组SCG配置,辅基站SN承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,辅基站SN承载的所述PDCP上下文,辅基站SN承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的SDAP的配置,辅基站SN承载的PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The mapping relationship between the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN and the data radio bearer DRB, the configuration of the secondary cell group SCG, the configuration of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP carried by the secondary base station SN, the PDCP context carried by the secondary base station SN, the secondary base station The configuration of the SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the SN, the security indication and the security result of the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN, etc., are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,终端设备的上下文还可以包括辅基站SN与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接,辅基站SN和主基站MN的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接和用户面连接等中的至少一种,本申请实施例对此不作限定。那么,此时,第一资源可以指辅基站SN保留的该终端设备的上下文。Optionally, the context of the terminal device may also include the terminal device-specific user plane connection between the secondary base station SN and the core network, and the terminal device-specific control plane connection and user on the interface between the secondary base station SN and the primary base station MN. At least one of surface connection, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. Then, at this time, the first resource may refer to the context of the terminal device reserved by the secondary base station SN.
本申请实施例中,辅基站SN可以在终端设备处于RRC去激活态时,确定释放保留的专用于该终端设备的第一资源。可以理解的是,辅基站SN确定释放该第一资源,也可以称为辅基站SN确定不再继续为该终端设备服务或者辅基站SN不具备继续为该终端设备服务的能力。In the embodiment of the present application, the secondary base station SN may determine to release the reserved first resource dedicated to the terminal device when the terminal device is in the RRC deactivated state. It is understandable that the secondary base station SN determines to release the first resource, which can also be referred to as the secondary base station SN determining not to continue to serve the terminal device or the secondary base station SN does not have the ability to continue to serve the terminal device.
作为示例,辅基站SN可以根据自身负载,确定是否释放第一资源。一种可能的情况,辅基站SN可以在负载过重导致不能继续为终端设备进行服务时,可以确定释放第一资源,或者,辅基站在没有负载过重时,确定不释放第一资源,此时辅基站SN能够继续为终端设备服务,即可以恢复与终端设备的RRC连接。As an example, the secondary base station SN may determine whether to release the first resource according to its own load. In a possible situation, the secondary base station SN may determine to release the first resource when the load is too heavy and it cannot continue to serve the terminal device, or the secondary base station may determine not to release the first resource when the load is not too heavy. The time-assisted base station SN can continue to serve the terminal equipment, that is, it can resume the RRC connection with the terminal equipment.
或者,在一些实施例中,辅基站SN还可以根据其他因素确定是否释放第一资源,本申请实施例对比不作具体限定。例如,当辅基站SN的配置改变使得辅基站SN不能接纳该终端设备时,可以确定释放第一资源。Alternatively, in some embodiments, the secondary base station SN may also determine whether to release the first resource according to other factors, which is not specifically limited in comparison with the embodiments of the present application. For example, when the configuration of the secondary base station SN is changed so that the secondary base station SN cannot accept the terminal device, it may be determined to release the first resource.
120,辅基站SN向主基站MN发送第一消息,该第一消息用于通知辅基站SN不能恢 复对该终端设备的服务。120. The secondary base station SN sends a first message to the primary base station MN, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station SN that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored.
对应的,主基站MN接收该第一消息。Correspondingly, the primary base station MN receives the first message.
本申请实施例中,主基站MN可以是配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的基站,也可以是终端设备恢复的基站。需要说明的是,配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的基站与终端设备恢复的基站可以为同一个基站,或者不同的基站。作为示例,终端设备的移动,可能会导致配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的基站与终端设备恢复的基站的不同。In the embodiment of the present application, the primary base station MN may be the base station that configures the terminal equipment to enter the RRC deactivated state, or may be the base station where the terminal equipment is restored. It should be noted that the base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state and the base station restored by the terminal device may be the same base station or different base stations. As an example, the movement of the terminal device may cause a difference between the base station configured to enter the RRC deactivated state and the base station restored by the terminal device.
一种可能的实现方式中,第一消息中可以携带原因值,该原因值可以表示辅基站过载,或者,标识辅基站不能恢复对该终端设备的服务。In a possible implementation manner, the first message may carry a cause value, and the cause value may indicate that the secondary base station is overloaded, or it may indicate that the secondary base station cannot restore service to the terminal device.
可选的,辅基站SN还还可以向主基站MN发送辅基站侧的终端设备的上下文。一种实现方式,第一消息中可以携带辅基站侧的终端设备的上下文。可以理解的是,也可以通过不同于第一消息的消息向MN发送辅基站侧的终端设备的上下文。Optionally, the secondary base station SN may also send the context of the terminal device on the secondary base station side to the primary base station MN. In an implementation manner, the first message may carry the context of the terminal device on the secondary base station side. It is understandable that the context of the terminal device on the secondary base station side can also be sent to the MN through a message different from the first message.
130,主基站根据该第一消息,确定所述辅基站不能恢复对该终端设备的服务。130. According to the first message, the primary base station determines that the secondary base station cannot resume service to the terminal device.
可选的,主基站在确定辅基站不能恢复对终端设备的服务之后,可以释放保留的第二资源。其中,该第二资源为主基站与辅基站之间的接口上的该终端设备专用的资源。Optionally, the primary base station may release the reserved second resource after determining that the secondary base station cannot restore service to the terminal device. Wherein, the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
作为示例,第二资源可以包括主基站与辅基站之间的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接、用户面连接和传输资源中的至少一个。As an example, the second resource may include at least one of a control plane connection, a user plane connection, and a transmission resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
一种可能的设计中,上述主基站与辅基站接口上的该终端设备专用的传输资源,例如可以为辅基站与主基站之间的接口的用户面传输资源、辅基站与主基站之间的接口控制面传输资源中的至少一种。In a possible design, the transmission resources dedicated to the terminal equipment on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station may be, for example, the user plane transmission resources of the interface between the secondary base station and the primary base station, and the transmission resources between the secondary base station and the primary base station. At least one of the interface control plane transmission resources.
具体的,主基站与辅基站之间的接口上的该终端设备专用的控制面连接、用户面连接可以参见上文中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the dedicated control plane connection and user plane connection of the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station can be referred to the above description, and for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
对应的,当辅基站SN发送辅基站侧的终端设备的上下文时,主基站MN可以获取辅基站侧的上下文。主基站MN可以根据该上下文获取辅基站SN对该终端设备配置信息。可选的,当辅基站SN释放之后,主基站可以根据该配置信息,重新对终端设备进行增量(delta)配置,或将该配置信息发送给新的辅基站,用于该新的辅基站进行配置的参考。Correspondingly, when the secondary base station SN sends the context of the terminal device on the secondary base station side, the primary base station MN can acquire the context on the secondary base station side. The primary base station MN can obtain the configuration information of the terminal device by the secondary base station SN according to the context. Optionally, after the secondary base station SN is released, the primary base station can reconfigure the terminal device delta according to the configuration information, or send the configuration information to the new secondary base station for use in the new secondary base station Reference for configuration.
可选的,主基站MN还可以建立用于承载服务质量QoS流/分组数据单元PDU会话的NG-U隧道,其中,在主基站MN释放上述第二资源之前,该QoS流/PDU会话承载在辅基站MN的NG-U隧道上。也就是说,MN#1还可以进行路径切换(path switch)。这样,能够实现将原来承载在SN的QoS流(flow)/PDU会话(session)的NG-U隧道转移到MN上。Optionally, the primary base station MN may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, where, before the primary base station MN releases the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on On the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station MN. In other words, MN#1 can also perform path switch. In this way, it is possible to transfer the NG-U tunnel originally carried on the SN's QoS flow/PDU session (session) to the MN.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,当终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备时,辅基站SN可以向主基站MN发送第一消息,来通知辅基站SN不能继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the secondary base station SN may send a first message to the primary base station MN to notify The secondary base station SN cannot continue to serve the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
图9是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站,与终端设备请求恢复的主基站相同,比如均为MN#1。应理解,图9示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图9中的各个操作的变形。此外,图9中的各个步骤可以 按照与图9呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图9中的全部操作。9 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, where the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1. It should be understood that FIG. 9 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 9. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 9 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 9, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 9 are to be performed.
201,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。201. MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
202,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。202. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
203,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。203. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
可选的,SN可以基于该请求消息,释放该终端设备的部分配置,例如RLC层以及以下的配置。Optionally, the SN may release part of the configuration of the terminal device based on the request message, such as the RLC layer and the following configuration.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,步骤202和203的顺序可以互换,也就是说,对202和203的先后顺序不做限定。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, the order of steps 202 and 203 can be interchanged, that is, the order of 202 and 203 is not limited.
204,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤203中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。204. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 203 to MN#1.
可选的,该ACK中可以携带SN侧的终端设备的上下文。具体的,上下文可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Optionally, the ACK may carry the context of the terminal device on the SN side. Specifically, the context can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
205,终端设备向MN#1发送恢复请求(resume request),用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于辅助MN#1确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。205. The terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#1, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
206,MN#1向SN发送SN恢复请求(SN resume request),用于请求SN恢复对终端设备的服务。该SN恢复请求可以为第一请求的一个示例。206. MN#1 sends an SN resume request (SN resume request) to the SN, which is used to request the SN to resume service to the terminal device. The SN recovery request may be an example of the first request.
可选的,该SN恢复请求可以为SN修改请求(SN modification request),其中携带指示信息,该指示信息用于指示SN为终端设备生成或更新SCG配置,从而令SN获知该消息表示请求SN恢复。Optionally, the SN recovery request may be an SN modification request (SN modification request), which carries indication information, which is used to instruct the SN to generate or update the SCG configuration for the terminal device, so that the SN is informed that the message indicates that the SN is requested to recover .
可选的,207,SN确定负载过重。Optionally, 207, SN determines that the load is too heavy.
具体的,SN可以根据自身负载判断是否能够继续为终端设备提供服务。当SN确定过载时,则不能继续为终端设备提供服务。此时,SN确定释放专用于该终端设备的第一资源。具体的,第一资源可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the SN can determine whether it can continue to provide services for the terminal device according to its own load. When the SN determines that it is overloaded, it cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device. At this time, the SN determines to release the first resource dedicated to the terminal device. Specifically, the first resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选的,当SN确定没有过载时,则SN确定继续为终端设备提供服务,即不需要释放第一资源。Optionally, when the SN determines that there is no overload, the SN determines to continue to provide services for the terminal device, that is, there is no need to release the first resource.
本申请实施例中,对206和207的先后顺序不做限定。也就是说,步骤207也可以在步骤206之前发生。In the embodiment of the present application, the sequence of 206 and 207 is not limited. In other words, step 207 may also occur before step 206.
208,SN向MN#1发送SN恢复拒绝(SN resume reject)消息,用于表示拒绝对终端设备继续服务的请求。这里,SN恢复拒绝消息对应于图8中的第一消息的一个示例。208. The SN sends an SN resume reject (SN resume reject) message to MN#1, which is used to indicate that the request for continued service to the terminal device is rejected. Here, the SN recovery rejection message corresponds to an example of the first message in FIG. 8.
可选的,SN恢复拒绝消息中携带原因值,表示SN过载,即标识SN不能恢复对该终端设备的服务。Optionally, the SN recovery rejection message carries a reason value, indicating that the SN is overloaded, that is, it indicates that the SN cannot recover the service to the terminal device.
可选的,当SN恢复请求为SN修改请求时,SN恢复拒绝消息可以为SN修改确认消息或SN修改失败消息。与现有技术不同的是,MN#1收到SN恢复拒绝消息(例如SN修改确认消息或SN修改失败消息),需要知道该消息表示的不是修改失败,而是SN不能成功恢复,效果等同于SN释放。可选的,本申请实施例中,SN修改确认消息或SN修改失败消息中包括原因值,表示SN拒绝对终端设备继续服务。Optionally, when the SN restoration request is an SN modification request, the SN restoration rejection message may be an SN modification confirmation message or an SN modification failure message. Different from the prior art, MN#1 receives an SN recovery rejection message (such as an SN modification confirmation message or an SN modification failure message), and needs to know that the message does not indicate a modification failure, but that the SN cannot successfully recover. The effect is equivalent to SN is released. Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the SN modification confirmation message or the SN modification failure message includes a reason value, which indicates that the SN refuses to continue serving the terminal device.
可选的,当ACK中没有包括SN侧的终端设备的上下文时,SN恢复拒绝消息中还可 以包括SN侧的终端设备的上下文。Optionally, when the ACK does not include the context of the terminal device on the SN side, the SN recovery rejection message may also include the context of the terminal device on the SN side.
本申请实施例中,SN在发送该SN恢复拒绝消息的同时,或者之后,释放为该终端设备保留的第一资源,该第一资源为专用于该终端设备的资源。In the embodiment of the present application, the SN releases the first resource reserved for the terminal device at the same time or after sending the SN recovery rejection message, and the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
对应的,MN#1接收该SN恢复拒绝消息,并根据该消息,确定SN不能继续为终端设备服务。此时,MN#1可以释放第二资源,第二资源为MN#1与SN之间的接口上的该终端设备的专用的资源。具体的,第二资源可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Correspondingly, MN#1 receives the SN recovery rejection message, and according to the message, determines that the SN cannot continue to serve the terminal device. At this time, MN#1 can release the second resource, which is a dedicated resource of the terminal device on the interface between MN#1 and the SN. Specifically, the second resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选的,MN#1还可以建立用于承载服务质量QoS流/分组数据单元PDU会话的NG-U隧道,其中,在释放所述第二资源之前,所述QoS流/PDU会话承载在所述辅基站的NG-U隧道上。Optionally, MN#1 may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flow/packet data unit PDU session, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried in all On the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station.
可选的,当SN确定继续为终端设备服务时,SN向MN#1发送SN恢复确认消息,用于表示能够继续对终端设备服务。可选的,当SN恢复请求消息为SN修改请求消息时,SN恢复确认消息可以为SN修改确认消息。Optionally, when the SN determines to continue serving the terminal device, the SN sends an SN recovery confirmation message to MN#1 to indicate that it can continue to serve the terminal device. Optionally, when the SN recovery request message is an SN modification request message, the SN recovery confirmation message may be an SN modification confirmation message.
209,MN#1向终端设备发送配置信息。209. MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
可选的,当MN#1接收到SN恢复拒绝消息时,该配置信息中可以包括指示信息,用于告知终端设备释放SN相关的配置。作为示例,SN相关配置具体包含以下信息中的至少一种:SCG配置、SN配置的测量信息、功率配置信息等。Optionally, when MN#1 receives the SN restoration rejection message, the configuration information may include indication information for informing the terminal device to release the SN-related configuration. As an example, the SN-related configuration specifically includes at least one of the following information: SCG configuration, SN configuration measurement information, power configuration information, and so on.
可选的,该配置信息可以携带在RRC恢复消息中,或者承载于RRC重配置消息中。Optionally, the configuration information can be carried in the RRC recovery message or carried in the RRC reconfiguration message.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,当SN在接收到SN恢复请求时,可以向MN发送SN恢复拒绝消息,来通知SN不能继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request, it can send the SN to the MN Send an SN recovery rejection message to notify the SN that it cannot continue to serve the terminal device. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
图10是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站(比如为MN#1),与终端设备请求恢复的主基站(比如MN#2)不同。应理解,图10示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图10中的各个操作的变形。此外,图10中的各个步骤可以按照与图10呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图10中的全部操作。Figure 10 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (for example, MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery The main base station (such as MN#2) is different. It should be understood that FIG. 10 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 10. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 10 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 10, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 10 are to be performed.
301,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。301. MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
302,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。302. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
303,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。303. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
304,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤303中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。304. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 303 to MN#1.
具体的,步骤301至304可以参见图9中的步骤201至204,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 301 to 304 can refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG.
305,终端设备向MN#2发送恢复请求(resume request),用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于 辅助MN#2确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。可以理解,当终端设备在由MN#1移动至MN#2之后,会向MN#2发送恢复请求。305. The terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#2, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request can carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN. It can be understood that after the terminal device moves from MN#1 to MN#2, it will send a recovery request to MN#2.
306,MN#2从MN#1请求上下文。306, MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
这里,该上下文为MN#1侧保存的该终端设备的上下文。Here, the context is the context of the terminal device saved on the MN#1 side.
作为示例,该上下文包括以下信息中的至少一种:As an example, the context includes at least one of the following information:
MN#1承载的QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,主小区组MCG配置,MN#1承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,MN#1承载的所述PDCP上下文,MN#1承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的SDAP配置,MN#1承载的PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果等,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。The mapping relationship between the QoS flow carried by MN#1 and the data radio bearer DRB, the MCG configuration of the primary cell group, the PDCP configuration of the packet data convergence protocol carried by MN#1, the PDCP context carried by MN#1, and the PDCP context carried by MN#1 The SDAP configuration corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow, the security indication and the security result of the PDU session/QoS flow carried by MN#1, etc., are not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,MN#2还可以指示MN#1请求恢复SN。Optionally, MN#2 may also instruct MN#1 to request restoration of SN.
307,MN#1向MN#2发送MN侧的终端设备的上下文。307. MN#1 sends the context of the terminal device on the MN side to MN#2.
可选的,MN#1还可以向终端设备发送SN的标识,以及终端设备标识。一些实施例中,终端设备标识可以为SN为终端设备分配的Xn接口上的终端设备标识。作为示例,当该终端设备为UE时,终端设备标识可以为SN UE XnAP ID。Optionally, MN#1 may also send the SN identification and the terminal device identification to the terminal device. In some embodiments, the terminal device identifier may be the terminal device identifier on the Xn interface assigned to the terminal device by the SN. As an example, when the terminal device is a UE, the terminal device identifier may be SN UE XnAP ID.
可选的,MN#1还可以向MN#1发送指示信息,用于向MN#2指示MN#1为终端设备挂起了SN。Optionally, MN#1 may also send indication information to MN#1 to indicate to MN#2 that MN#1 has suspended the SN for the terminal device.
308,MN#2向SN发送SN恢复请求(SN resume request),用于请求SN恢复对终端设备的服务。308. MN#2 sends an SN resume request (SN resume request) to the SN, which is used to request the SN to resume service to the terminal device.
可选的,SN恢复请求中可以包括终端设备标识,用于SN识别该终端设备。作为示例,该终端设备标识可以为SN为终端设备分配的Xn接口上的标识。Optionally, the SN recovery request may include a terminal device identification, which is used by the SN to identify the terminal device. As an example, the terminal device identifier may be the identifier on the Xn interface allocated by the SN for the terminal device.
可选的,该SN恢复请求可以为SN修改请求(SN modification request),其中携带指示信息,该指示信息用于指示SN为终端设备生成或更新SCG配置,从而令SN获知该消息表示请求SN恢复。Optionally, the SN recovery request may be an SN modification request (SN modification request), which carries indication information, which is used to instruct the SN to generate or update the SCG configuration for the terminal device, so that the SN is informed that the message indicates that the SN is requested to recover .
可选的,309,SN确定负载过重。Optionally, 309, SN determines that the load is too heavy.
310,SN向MN#2发送SN恢复拒绝(SN resume reject)消息,用于表示拒绝对终端设备继续服务的请求。310. The SN sends an SN resume reject (SN resume reject) message to MN#2, which is used to indicate that the request for continued service to the terminal device is rejected.
311,MN#2向终端设备发送配置信息。311. MN#2 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
具体的,步骤309至311中,SN与MN#2的交互过程可以参见图8中步骤207至209中SN与MN#1的交互过程中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, in steps 309 to 311, the interaction process between SN and MN#2 can be referred to the description in the interaction process between SN and MN#1 in steps 207 to 209 in FIG. 8. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,当SN在接收到SN恢复请求时,可以向MN发送SN恢复拒绝消息,来通知SN不能继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, when the SN receives the SN recovery request, it can send the SN to the MN Send an SN recovery rejection message to notify the SN that it cannot continue to serve the terminal device. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
图11是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站,与终端设备请求恢复的主基站相同,比如均为MN#1。应理解,图11示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图11中的各个操作的变形。此外,图11中的各个步骤可以按照与图11呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图11中的全部操 作。Figure 11 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, where the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1. It should be understood that FIG. 11 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 11. In addition, the steps in Fig. 11 can be performed in a different order from that presented in Fig. 11, and it is possible that not all the operations in Fig. 11 are to be performed.
401,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。401. MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
402,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。402. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
403,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。403. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
404,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤403中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。404. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 403 to MN#1.
具体的,步骤401至404可以参见图9中的步骤201至204,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 401 to 404 can refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG.
可选的,405,SN确定负载过重。Optionally, 405, SN determines that the load is too heavy.
具体的,SN可以根据自身负载判断是否能够继续为终端设备提供服务。当SN确定过载时,则不能继续为终端设备提供服务,可以执行406。此时,SN确定释放专用于该终端设备的第一资源。具体的,第一资源可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the SN can determine whether it can continue to provide services for the terminal device according to its own load. When the SN determines that it is overloaded, it cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device and can execute 406. At this time, the SN determines to release the first resource dedicated to the terminal device. Specifically, the first resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选的,当SN确定没有过载时,则SN确定继续为终端设备提供服务,即不需要释放第一资源。此时,SN不需要向MN#1发送消息。也就是说,MN接收到终端设备的恢复请求时,如果SN还没有向MN#1发送用于请求释放专用于终端设备的第一资源的SN释放请求消息,MN#1可以认为SN可以继续为终端设备服务。Optionally, when the SN determines that there is no overload, the SN determines to continue to provide services for the terminal device, that is, there is no need to release the first resource. At this time, the SN does not need to send a message to MN#1. In other words, when the MN receives the recovery request of the terminal device, if the SN has not sent an SN release request message for requesting the release of the first resource dedicated to the terminal device to MN#1, MN#1 can consider that SN can continue to be Terminal equipment service.
一种实现方式中,当步骤404中的ACK中包括SN侧的终端设备的上下文时,如果MN#1接收到了终端设备发送的恢复请求,且没有接收到SN主动发送的SN释放请求消息,则MN#1可以根据ACK中的SN侧的终端设备的上下文,对SN进行恢复。In one implementation, when the ACK in step 404 includes the context of the terminal device on the SN side, if MN#1 receives the recovery request sent by the terminal device, and does not receive the SN release request message actively sent by the SN, then MN#1 can restore the SN according to the context of the terminal device on the SN side in the ACK.
406,SN向MN#1发送SN释放请求消息,用于请求释放专用于终端设备的第一资源。SN请求释放第一资源,则表示SN不能继续为终端设备提供服务。也就是说,本申请实施例中,当SN确定不能继续为终端设备提供服务时,可以主动向MN#1发送SN释放请求消息。这里,SN释放请求消息对应于图8中的第一消息的一个示例。406. The SN sends an SN release request message to MN#1 for requesting the release of the first resource dedicated to the terminal device. The SN requests the release of the first resource, which means that the SN cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device. That is to say, in this embodiment of the application, when the SN determines that it cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device, it can actively send an SN release request message to MN#1. Here, the SN release request message corresponds to an example of the first message in FIG. 8.
可选的,当ACK中没有包括SN侧的终端设备的上下文时,SN释放请求消息中还可以包括SN侧的终端设备的上下文。Optionally, when the context of the terminal device on the SN side is not included in the ACK, the SN release request message may also include the context of the terminal device on the SN side.
本申请实施例中,SN在发送该SN释放请求消息的同时,或者之后,释放为该终端设备保留的第一资源,该第一资源为专用于该终端设备的资源。In the embodiment of the present application, the SN releases the first resource reserved for the terminal device at the same time or after sending the SN release request message, and the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
对应的,MN#1接收该SN释放请求消息,并根据该消息,确定SN不能继续为终端设备服务。此时,MN#1可以释放第二资源,第二资源为MN#2与SN之间的接口上该终端设备专用的资源。Correspondingly, MN#1 receives the SN release request message, and according to the message, determines that the SN cannot continue to serve the terminal device. At this time, MN#1 can release the second resource, which is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between MN#2 and the SN.
具体的,第二资源可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, the second resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
407,MN#1向SN发送SN释放确认消息。407. MN#1 sends an SN release confirmation message to the SN.
可选的,MN还可以建立用于承载服务质量QoS流/分组数据单元PDU会话的NG-U隧道,其中,在释放所述第二资源之前,所述QoS流/PDU会话承载在所述辅基站的NG-U隧道上。Optionally, the MN may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on the auxiliary On the NG-U tunnel of the base station.
408,终端设备向MN#1发送恢复请求(resume request),用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于 辅助MN#1确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。408: The terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#1, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
409,MN#1向终端设备发送配置信息。409. MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
这里,该配置信息可以参考图9中步骤209中的配置信息的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Here, the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,SN可以主动向MN发送SN释放请求消息,来指示SN不能继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the SN can actively send an SN release request message to the MN to indicate SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
图12是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站(比如为MN#1),与终端设备请求恢复的主基站(比如MN#2)不同。应理解,图12示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图12中的各个操作的变形。此外,图12中的各个步骤可以按照与图12呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图12中的全部操作。Figure 12 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (such as MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery The main base station (such as MN#2) is different. It should be understood that FIG. 12 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 12. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 12 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 12, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 12 are to be performed.
501,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。501. MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
502,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。502. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
503,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。503. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
504,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤503中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。504. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 503 to MN#1.
具体的,步骤501至504可以参见图9中的步骤201至204,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 501 to 504 can refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选的,505,SN确定负载过重。Optionally, 505, SN determines that the load is too heavy.
506,SN向MN#1发送SN释放请求消息,用于请求释放专用于终端设备的第一资源。506. The SN sends an SN release request message to MN#1 to request the release of the first resource dedicated to the terminal device.
507,MN#1向SN发送SN释放确认消息。507, MN#1 sends an SN release confirmation message to the SN.
具体的,步骤505至507可以参见图11中的步骤405至407中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 505 to 507 can be referred to the descriptions of steps 405 to 407 in FIG. 11, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
508,终端设备向MN#2发送恢复请求(resume request),用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于辅助MN#2确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。508: The terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#2, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
509,MN#2向MN#1请求上下文。509, MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
510,MN#1向MN#2发送MN侧的终端设备的上下文。510. MN#1 sends the context of the terminal device on the MN side to MN#2.
具体的,步骤509和510可以参见图10中的306和307,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 509 and 510 can be referred to 306 and 307 in FIG. 10, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选的,MN#1可以向MN#2通知挂起的SN已经被释放。Optionally, MN#1 may notify MN#2 that the suspended SN has been released.
511,MN#2向终端设备发送配置信息。511. MN#2 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
这里,该配置信息可以参考图9中步骤209中的配置信息的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Here, the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态,且辅基站SN确定不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,SN可以主动向MN发送SN释放请求消息,来 指示SN不能继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, and the secondary base station SN determines that it cannot continue to be the terminal device, the SN can actively send an SN release request message to the MN to indicate SN cannot continue to serve terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
图13是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站,与终端设备请求恢复的主基站相同,比如均为MN#1。应理解,图13示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图13中的各个操作的变形。此外,图13中的各个步骤可以按照与图13呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图13中的全部操作。FIG. 13 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1. It should be understood that FIG. 13 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 13. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 13 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 13, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 13 are to be performed.
601,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。601, MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
602,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。602. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
603,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。603. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
604,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤603中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。604. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 603 to MN#1.
具体的,步骤601至604可以参见图9中的步骤201至204,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 601 to 604 may refer to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
605,SN将自身的负载信息告知MN#1。605, SN informs MN#1 of its own load information.
可选的,SN可以周期性的发送负载信息给MN#1。或者,SN可以基于事件触发向MN#1发送负载信息。作为一个示例,具体事件可以为当负载信息发生变化时,向MN#1发送更新后的负载信息。其中,负载信息发生变化,可以为由负载低变为负载高,或者由负载高变为负载低。作为另一个示例,负载信息可以为量化的数值区间,或者为简单的等级指示(例如高、中、低)等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Optionally, the SN can periodically send load information to MN#1. Or, the SN can send load information to MN#1 based on an event trigger. As an example, the specific event may be sending updated load information to MN#1 when the load information changes. Where the load information changes, it can be a change from a low load to a high load, or a change from a high load to a low load. As another example, the load information may be a quantified numerical interval, or a simple level indicator (for example, high, medium, low), etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
606,终端设备向MN#1发送恢复请求,用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于辅助MN#1确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。606: The terminal device sends a recovery request to MN#1 for requesting to recover from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
607,MN#1根据605中接收到的SN负载信息,判断是否过载。607, MN#1 judges whether it is overloaded according to the SN load information received in 605.
可选的,步骤607可以在步骤606之后执行,即MN在收到终端设备的恢复请求之后,基于SN的负载信息,确定是向SN发送SN恢复请求消息,还是SN释放请求消息。Optionally, step 607 may be performed after step 606, that is, after receiving the recovery request from the terminal device, the MN determines whether to send the SN recovery request message or the SN release request message to the SN based on the load information of the SN.
具体的,当确定SN没有过载时,执行步骤608a和步骤609a,并将恢复终端设备与MN#1和SN的RRC连接状态。Specifically, when it is determined that the SN is not overloaded, step 608a and step 609a are executed, and the RRC connection state of the terminal device with MN#1 and SN will be restored.
608a,MN#1向SN发送SN恢复请求。608a, MN#1 sends an SN recovery request to the SN.
609a,SN向MN#1发送SN恢复确认。609a, SN sends SN recovery confirmation to MN#1.
具体的,步骤608a和609a可以参见现有技术中恢复SN恢复的过程,这里不再详细描述。Specifically, steps 608a and 609a can refer to the process of restoring SN in the prior art, which will not be described in detail here.
当确定SN过载时,MN可以主动触发SN释放流程,即执行步骤608b和步骤609b。When it is determined that the SN is overloaded, the MN can actively trigger the SN release process, that is, perform step 608b and step 609b.
608b,MN#1向SN发送SN释放请求,用于请求释放SN。释放SN,则SN不能继续为终端设备提供服务。具体而言,SN可以释放专用于终端设备的第一资源。具体的,第一资源可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。608b, MN#1 sends an SN release request to the SN to request the release of the SN. If the SN is released, the SN cannot continue to provide services for the terminal device. Specifically, the SN can release the first resource dedicated to the terminal device. Specifically, the first resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
本申请实施例中,MN#1在向SN发送SN释放请求时,或者之后,可以释放第二资 源,第二资源为MN与SN之间的接口上该终端设备专用的资源。具体的,第二资源可以参见图8中的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。In the embodiment of this application, MN#1 may release the second resource when or after sending the SN release request to the SN. The second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the MN and the SN. Specifically, the second resource can be referred to the description in FIG. 8. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选的,MN还可以建立用于承载服务质量QoS流/分组数据单元PDU会话的NG-U隧道,其中,在释放所述第二资源之前,所述QoS流/PDU会话承载在所述辅基站的NG-U隧道上。Optionally, the MN may also establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on the auxiliary On the NG-U tunnel of the base station.
609b,SN向MN#1发送SN释放确认。609b, SN sends SN release confirmation to MN#1.
可选的,当ACK中没有包括SN侧的终端设备的上下文时,SN释放确认中可以包括SN侧的终端设备上下文。Optionally, when the SN side terminal device context is not included in the ACK, the SN release confirmation may include the SN side terminal device context.
本申请实施例中,SN在发送该SN释放请求消息的同时,或者之后,释放为该终端设备保留的第一资源,该第一资源为专用于该终端设备的资源。In the embodiment of the present application, the SN releases the first resource reserved for the terminal device at the same time or after sending the SN release request message, and the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
610,MN#1向终端设备发送配置信息。610. MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
这里,该配置信息可以参考图9中步骤209中的配置信息的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Here, the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态时,辅基站将自身的负载信息发送给主基站,主基站在确定辅基站负荷过重不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,主动向SN发送SN释放请求消息,来指示释放SN,实现SN不需要继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, the secondary base station sends its own load information to the primary base station, and the primary base station determines that the secondary base station is overloaded and cannot continue to serve as the terminal device. In the case of SN, actively send an SN release request message to the SN to instruct to release the SN, so that the SN does not need to continue to serve the terminal device. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
图14是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站(比如为MN#1),与终端设备请求恢复的主基站(比如MN#2)不同。应理解,图14示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图14中的各个操作的变形。此外,图14中的各个步骤可以按照与图14呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图14中的全部操作。14 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (for example, MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery The main base station (such as MN#2) is different. It should be understood that FIG. 14 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 14. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 14 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 14, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 14 are to be performed.
701,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。701. MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
702,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。702. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
703,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。703. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
704,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤703中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。704. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 703 to MN#1.
具体的,步骤701至704可以参见图9中的步骤201至204,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 701 to 704 can be referred to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
705,SN将自身的负载信息告知MN#1。705. SN informs MN#1 of its own load information.
具体的,步骤705可以参见图13中步骤605的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, for step 705, refer to the description of step 605 in FIG. 13, and for brevity, details are not repeated here.
706,终端设备向MN#2发送恢复请求,用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于辅助MN#2确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。706: The terminal device sends a recovery request to MN#2 for requesting to recover from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
707,MN#2向MN#1请求上下文。707, MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
708,MN#1根据705中接收到的SN负载信息,判断是否过载。708, MN#1 judges whether it is overloaded according to the SN load information received in 705.
具体的,当确定SN没有过载时,执行步骤709a至711a,并将恢复终端设备与MN#1和SN的RRC连接状态。Specifically, when it is determined that the SN is not overloaded, steps 709a to 711a are executed, and the RRC connection state of the terminal device with MN#1 and SN will be restored.
709a,MN#1向MN#2发送终端设备上下文。709a, MN#1 sends the terminal device context to MN#2.
710a,MN#2向SN发送SN恢复请求。710a, MN#2 sends an SN recovery request to the SN.
711a,SN向MN#2发送SN恢复确认。711a, SN sends SN recovery confirmation to MN#2.
当确定SN过载时,MN可以主动触发SN释放流程,即执行步骤710b和步骤711b。When it is determined that the SN is overloaded, the MN can actively trigger the SN release process, that is, perform step 710b and step 711b.
710b,MN#1向SN发送SN释放请求,用于请求释放SN。710b, MN#1 sends an SN release request to the SN to request the release of the SN.
711b,SN向MN#1发送SN释放确认。711b, SN sends SN release confirmation to MN#1.
一些实施例中,步骤706和707可以在709b至711b(或709a至711a)之前执行。也就是说,当MN#2向MN#1请求上下文时,MN#1可以确定终端设备请求恢复到RRC连接态。这时,MN#1可以判断SN是否过载。如果MN#1确定SN过载,则主动触发SN释放流程,即执行步骤709b至711b。如果SN没有过载,则执行步骤709a至711a。In some embodiments, steps 706 and 707 may be performed before 709b to 711b (or 709a to 711a). That is, when MN#2 requests a context from MN#1, MN#1 can determine that the terminal device requests to restore to the RRC connected state. At this time, MN#1 can judge whether SN is overloaded. If MN#1 determines that the SN is overloaded, it actively triggers the SN release process, that is, steps 709b to 711b are executed. If the SN is not overloaded, steps 709a to 711a are executed.
一些实施例中,步骤706和707可以在709b至711b之后执行。也就是说,当MN#1确定SN过载时,将主动触发SN释放过程,即执行710b和步骤711b。之后,如果MN#2向MN#1请求上下文,则MN#1可以执行709b。In some embodiments, steps 706 and 707 may be performed after 709b to 711b. That is, when MN#1 determines that the SN is overloaded, it will actively trigger the SN release process, that is, execute 710b and step 711b. After that, if MN#2 requests context from MN#1, MN#1 can execute 709b.
709b,MN#1向MN#2发送终端设备上下文。可选的,此时,MN#1还可以向MN#2通知挂起的SN已经被释放。可选的,其中可以携带原因值,表示SN负载过重。709b, MN#1 sends the terminal device context to MN#2. Optionally, at this time, MN#1 may also notify MN#2 that the suspended SN has been released. Optionally, a cause value can be carried in it, which indicates that the SN is overloaded.
具体的,710b和711b可以参见图13中的步骤608b和609b的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, for 710b and 711b, refer to the description of steps 608b and 609b in FIG. 13, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
712,MN#1向终端设备发送配置信息。712. MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
这里,该配置信息可以参考图9中步骤209中的配置信息的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Here, the configuration information can refer to the description of the configuration information in step 209 in FIG.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态时,辅基站将自身的负载信息发送给主基站,主基站在确定辅基站负荷过重不能继续为该终端设备的情况下,主动向SN发送SN释放请求消息,来指示释放SN,实现SN不需要继续为终端设备服务。基于此本申请实施例在辅基站SN恢复的过程中引入了准入控制机制,因而能够在辅基站SN不能恢复成功的情况下,完成辅基站SN的释放。Therefore, in the dual-connected network architecture of the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state, the secondary base station sends its own load information to the primary base station, and the primary base station determines that the secondary base station is overloaded and cannot continue to serve as the terminal device. In the case of SN, actively send an SN release request message to the SN to instruct to release the SN, so that the SN does not need to continue to serve the terminal device. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces an admission control mechanism in the recovery process of the secondary base station SN, so that the release of the secondary base station SN can be completed when the secondary base station SN cannot be successfully recovered.
图15是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站,与终端设备请求恢复的主基站相同,比如均为MN#1。应理解,图15示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图15中的各个操作的变形。此外,图15中的各个步骤可以按照与图15呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行图15中的全部操作。Figure 15 is a schematic flow chart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, where the primary base station that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state is the same as the primary base station that the terminal device requests to recover, such as both It is MN#1. It should be understood that FIG. 15 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 15. In addition, the various steps in FIG. 15 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 15, and it is possible that not all operations in FIG. 15 are to be performed.
801,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。801. MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
802,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。802. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
803,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。803. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
804,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤803中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。804. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 803 to MN#1.
具体的,步骤801至804可以参见图9中的步骤201至204,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 801 to 804 can be referred to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
805,终端设备向MN#1发送恢复请求(resume request),用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于辅助MN#1确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。805. The terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#1, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#1 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
806,MN#1向终端设备发送配置信息。806. MN#1 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
可选的,该配置信息用于配置终端设备建立MCG RLC承载,并将上述MCG RLC承载与承载在SN上的PDU session/QoS flow关联。可选的,MN#1基于在步骤804中收到的终端设备上下文中的辅基站SN承载的PDU session/QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,不改变上述映射关系,为上述DRB建立一一对应的MCG RLC承载,并与上述DRB标识进行关联。可以理解,上述做法达到的效果是,保留SN承载的PDU session/QoS流与DRB的映射关系,把原DRB关联的SCG RLC承载替代为MCG RLC承载。下行方向,承载在原SN承载的PDU session/QoS的数据依然通过NG-U与SN的数据传输通道,经过SN的SDAP和PDCP处理,不同的是,上述经过数据处理的数据经过SN与MN#1之间的接口,进一步通过MCG RLC承载发送给终端设备。上行方向类似。Optionally, the configuration information is used to configure the terminal device to establish an MCG RLC bearer, and associate the above MCG RLC bearer with the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN. Optionally, MN#1 is based on the mapping relationship between the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN in the terminal device context received in step 804 and the data radio bearer DRB, without changing the above mapping relationship, and establishes a link for the above DRB. A corresponding MCG RLC bearer, and is associated with the above DRB identifier. It can be understood that the effect achieved by the above approach is to retain the mapping relationship between the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the SN and the DRB, and replace the SCG RLC bearer associated with the original DRB with the MCG RLC bearer. In the downstream direction, the PDU session/QoS data carried by the original SN still passes through the data transmission channel between NG-U and SN, and is processed by SN's SDAP and PDCP. The difference is that the above-mentioned data processed through SN and MN#1 The interface between them is further sent to the terminal device through the MCG RLC bearer. The upstream direction is similar.
807,MN#1向SN发送SN恢复指示,用于指示SN恢复对该终端设备的服务。807. MN#1 sends an SN recovery instruction to the SN, which is used to instruct the SN to resume service to the terminal device.
可选的,该恢复指示还用于指示SN启动承载在SN上的PDU session/QoS flow和对应的SDAP和PDCP的上下行数据传输。可选的,该恢复指示消息还包含承载在SN上的PDU session/QoS flow与MCG RLC bearer的映射关系。可选的,该恢复指示消息还包含用于MN#1接收将承载在MCG RLC bearer的下行数据的传输层地址信息。Optionally, the recovery indication is also used to instruct the SN to start the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN and the corresponding SDAP and PDCP uplink and downlink data transmission. Optionally, the recovery indication message also includes the mapping relationship between the PDU session/QoS flow and the MCG RLC bearer carried on the SN. Optionally, the recovery indication message also includes transport layer address information used for MN#1 to receive downlink data to be carried on the MCG RLC bearer.
808,SN向MN#1发送SN恢复响应,比如SN恢复确认消息。可选的,该恢复确认消息还包含用于SN接收将承载MCG RLC bearer的上行数据的传输层地址信息。可选的,该恢复确认消息还包含SCG的配置,用于终端设备更新在SN侧的配置。808. The SN sends an SN recovery response, such as an SN recovery confirmation message, to MN#1. Optionally, the recovery confirmation message further includes the transport layer address information used for the SN to receive the uplink data that will carry the MCG RLC bearer. Optionally, the recovery confirmation message also includes the configuration of the SCG, which is used for the terminal device to update the configuration on the SN side.
可选的,809,MN#1将从SN接收到的SCG的配置发送给终端设备,用于终端设备更新在SN侧的配置。Optionally, 809, MN#1 sends the configuration of the SCG received from the SN to the terminal device for the terminal device to update the configuration on the SN side.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态后重新恢复RRC连接时,主基站MN仅保留在辅基站SN上的SDAP和PDCP的处理,不使用辅基站SN上的物理无线传输资源(例如SCG RLC承载),而是为所有承载在SN上PDU session/QoS flow分配主基站MN上的物理无线传输资源(例如MCG RLC承载),从而降低辅基站SN上恢复对终端设备服务的开销,保证辅基站SN可以恢复对终端设备的服务。基于此本申请实施例在终端设备恢复DC操作的过程中引入了将SCG RLC承载重配为MCG RLC承载的过程,因而能够保障辅基站SN能够恢复成功。并且引入了恢复过程中的重配操作,使辅基站SN可以基于自身的情况(例如负载),完成辅基站SN侧的配置更新。Therefore, in the dual-connection network architecture in the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and resumes the RRC connection, the primary base station MN only retains the SDAP and PDCP processing on the secondary base station SN, and does not use the secondary base station SN. Instead, it allocates physical wireless transmission resources on the primary base station MN (such as MCG RLC bearer) for all the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN, thereby reducing the recovery on the secondary base station SN. The overhead of the terminal equipment service ensures that the secondary base station SN can resume the service to the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces the process of reconfiguring the SCG RLC bearer into the MCG RLC bearer during the process of the terminal device resuming the DC operation, thereby ensuring that the secondary base station SN can recover successfully. In addition, a reconfiguration operation in the recovery process is introduced, so that the secondary base station SN can complete the configuration update on the secondary base station SN based on its own situation (for example, load).
图16是从设备交互的角度示出的另一种准入控制的方法的示意性流程图,其中配置终端设备进入RRC去激活态的主基站(比如为MN#1),与终端设备请求恢复的主基站(比如MN#2)不同。应理解,图16示出了准入控制的方法的步骤或操作,但这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其他操作或者图16中的各个操作的变形。此外,图16中的各个步骤可以按照与图16呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执 行图16中的全部操作。16 is a schematic flowchart of another admission control method from the perspective of device interaction, in which the primary base station (such as MN#1) that configures the terminal device to enter the RRC deactivated state, and the terminal device request recovery The main base station (such as MN#2) is different. It should be understood that FIG. 16 shows the steps or operations of the admission control method, but these steps or operations are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of each operation in FIG. 16. In addition, the steps in FIG. 16 may be performed in a different order from that presented in FIG. 16, and it is possible that not all the operations in FIG. 16 are to be performed.
901,MN#1确定将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。901. MN#1 determines to configure the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state.
902,MN#1向终端设备发送RRC连接释放消息,用于将终端设备配置为RRC去激活态。902. MN#1 sends an RRC connection release message to the terminal device, which is used to configure the terminal device in an RRC deactivated state.
903,MN#1向SN发送请求消息,用于向SN告知终端设备已进入RRC去激活态,并请求挂起该SN。903. MN#1 sends a request message to the SN, which is used to inform the SN that the terminal device has entered the RRC deactivated state and request to suspend the SN.
904,SN向MN#1发送响应于步骤903中的请求消息的确认(acknowledge,ACK)。904. The SN sends an acknowledgement (acknowledge, ACK) in response to the request message in step 903 to MN#1.
具体的,步骤901至904可以参见图9中的步骤201至204,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 901 to 904 can be referred to steps 201 to 204 in FIG. 9, for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
905,终端设备向MN#2发送恢复请求(resume request),用于请求从RRC去激活态恢复到RRC连接态。可选的,恢复请求中可以携带SN是否可以恢复的相关信息,用于辅助MN#2确定是否可以向SN发送恢复请求。905: The terminal device sends a resume request (resume request) to MN#2, which is used to request to resume from the RRC deactivated state to the RRC connected state. Optionally, the recovery request may carry related information about whether the SN can be recovered, which is used to assist MN#2 in determining whether the recovery request can be sent to the SN.
906,MN#2向MN#1请求上下文。906, MN#2 requests context from MN#1.
907,MN#1向MN#2发送MN侧的终端设备的上下文。907. MN#1 sends the context of the terminal device on the MN side to MN#2.
具体的,步骤906和907可以参见图10中的306和307,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Specifically, steps 906 and 907 may refer to steps 306 and 307 in FIG. 10, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
可选的,MN#1可以向MN#2通知被挂起的SN的标识信息,以及该SN为终端设备分配的标识,作为示例,当终端设备为UE时,该标识可以为UE XnAP ID。Optionally, MN#1 may notify MN#2 of the identification information of the suspended SN and the identification allocated by the SN for the terminal device. As an example, when the terminal device is a UE, the identification may be UE XnAP ID.
908,MN#2向终端设备发送配置信息。908, MN#2 sends configuration information to the terminal device.
这里,该配置信息可以参考图15中步骤806中的配置信息的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Here, for the configuration information, reference may be made to the description of the configuration information in step 806 in FIG. 15. For the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
909,MN#2向SN发送SN恢复指示,用于指示SN恢复对该终端设备的服务。这里该SN恢复指示可以参考图15中步骤807中的SN恢复指示的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。可选的,该SN恢复指示消息还包含该SN为终端设备分配的标识,用于SN识别该终端设备。作为示例,当终端设备为UE时,该标识可以为UE XnAP ID。909. MN#2 sends an SN recovery instruction to the SN, which is used to instruct the SN to resume service to the terminal device. For the SN recovery instruction here, reference may be made to the description of the SN recovery instruction in step 807 in FIG. 15. For brevity, details are not repeated here. Optionally, the SN recovery instruction message further includes an identifier assigned by the SN to the terminal device, which is used by the SN to identify the terminal device. As an example, when the terminal device is a UE, the identifier may be the UE XnAP ID.
910,SN向MN#2发送SN恢复响应,例如SN恢复确认消息。这里,该配置信息可以参考图15中步骤807中SN恢复确认消息的描述,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。910. The SN sends an SN recovery response, such as an SN recovery confirmation message, to MN#2. Here, the configuration information can refer to the description of the SN recovery confirmation message in step 807 in FIG. 15, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
可选的,911,MN#2将从SN接收到的SCG的配置发送给终端设备,用于终端设备更新在SN侧的配置。Optionally, 911, MN#2 sends the configuration of the SCG received from the SN to the terminal device for the terminal device to update the configuration on the SN side.
因此,本申请实施例在双连接的网络架构中,在终端设备进入去激活态后重新恢复RRC连接时,主基站MN仅保留在辅基站SN上的SDAP和PDCP的处理,不使用辅基站SN上的物理无线传输资源(例如SCG RLC承载),而是为所有承载在SN上PDU session/QoS flow分配主基站MN上的物理无线传输资源(例如MCG RLC承载),从而降低辅基站SN上恢复对终端设备服务的开销,保证辅基站SN可以恢复对终端设备的服务。基于此本申请实施例在终端设备恢复DC操作的过程中引入了将SCG RLC承载重配为MCG RLC承载的过程,因而能够保障辅基站SN能够恢复成功。并且引入了恢复过程中的重配操作,使辅基站SN可以基于自身的情况(例如负载),完成辅基站SN侧的配置更新。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, in the dual-connection network architecture, when the terminal device enters the deactivated state and resumes the RRC connection, the primary base station MN only retains the SDAP and PDCP processing on the secondary base station SN, and does not use the secondary base station SN. Instead, it allocates physical wireless transmission resources on the primary base station MN (such as MCG RLC bearer) for all the PDU session/QoS flow carried on the SN, thereby reducing the recovery on the secondary base station SN. The overhead of the terminal equipment service ensures that the secondary base station SN can resume the service to the terminal equipment. Based on this, the embodiment of the present application introduces the process of reconfiguring the SCG RLC bearer into the MCG RLC bearer during the process of the terminal device resuming the DC operation, thereby ensuring that the secondary base station SN can recover successfully. In addition, a reconfiguration operation in the recovery process is introduced, so that the secondary base station SN can complete the configuration update on the secondary base station SN based on its own conditions (such as load).
可以理解的是,本申请上述各个实施例中,由主基站实现的方法也可以由可用于主基站的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现,由辅基站实现的方法也可以由可用于辅基站的部件 (例如芯片或者电路)实现。It is understandable that, in the foregoing embodiments of the present application, the method implemented by the primary base station can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the primary base station, and the method implemented by the secondary base station can also be implemented by the secondary base station. Components (such as chips or circuits) are implemented.
根据前述方法,图17为本申请实施例提供的无线通信的装置1000的示意图。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus 1000 provided in an embodiment of this application.
其中,该装置1000可以为辅基站,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于辅基站的芯片或电路。该装置1000可以包括处理单元1010(即,处理器的一例)和收发单元1030。Wherein, the device 1000 may be a secondary base station, or a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be provided in the secondary base station. The device 1000 may include a processing unit 1010 (that is, an example of a processor) and a transceiver unit 1030.
可选的,收发单元1030可以通过收发器或者收发器相关电路或者接口电路实现。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1030 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit or interface circuit.
可选的,该装置还可以包括存储单元1020。一种可能的方式中,该存储单元1020用于存储指令。可选的,该存储单元也可以用于存储数据或者信息。存储单元1020可以通过存储器实现。Optionally, the device may further include a storage unit 1020. In one possible manner, the storage unit 1020 is used to store instructions. Optionally, the storage unit may also be used to store data or information. The storage unit 1020 may be realized by a memory.
一种可能的设计中,该处理单元1010可以用于执行该存储单元1020存储的指令,以使装置1000实现如上述方法中辅基站执行的步骤。In a possible design, the processing unit 1010 may be used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1020, so that the apparatus 1000 implements the steps performed by the secondary base station in the foregoing method.
进一步的,该处理单元1010、存储单元1020、收发单元1030可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号。例如,该存储单元1020用于存储计算机程序,该处理单元1010可以用于从该存储单元1020中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制收发单元1030接收信号和/或发送信号,完成上述方法中辅基站的步骤。该存储单元1020可以集成在处理单元1010中,也可以与处理单元1010分开设置。Further, the processing unit 1010, the storage unit 1020, and the transceiver unit 1030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals. For example, the storage unit 1020 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 1010 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 1020 to control the transceiver unit 1030 to receive and/or send signals to complete the above method. The steps of the secondary base station. The storage unit 1020 may be integrated in the processing unit 1010, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 1010.
可选地,若该装置1000为通信设备,该收发单元1030可以包括接收器和发送器。其中,接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时,可以统称为收发器。Optionally, if the apparatus 1000 is a communication device, the transceiver unit 1030 may include a receiver and a transmitter. The receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively called a transceiver.
可选地,若该装置1000为芯片或电路,该收发单元1030可以包括输入接口和输出接口。Optionally, if the device 1000 is a chip or a circuit, the transceiver unit 1030 may include an input interface and an output interface.
作为一种实现方式,收发单元1030的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理单元1010可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理单元或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation manner, the function of the transceiver unit 1030 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver. The processing unit 1010 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
作为另一种实现方式,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的通信设备(例如,辅基站)。即将实现处理单元1010、收发单元1030功能的程序代码存储在存储单元1020中,通用处理单元通过执行存储单元1020中的代码来实现处理单元1010、收发单元1030的功能。As another implementation manner, a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the communication device (for example, a secondary base station) provided in the embodiment of the present application. That is, the program code for realizing the functions of the processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1030 is stored in the storage unit 1020. The general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 1010 and the transceiver unit 1030 by executing the code in the storage unit 1020.
在一种实现方式中,处理单元1010用于确定释放为无线资源控制RRC去激活态的终端设备保留的第一资源,其中,所述第一资源为专用于所述终端设备的资源。In an implementation manner, the processing unit 1010 is configured to determine to release a first resource reserved for a terminal device in a radio resource control RRC deactivated state, where the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device.
该收发单元1030用于向主基站发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于通知所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The transceiver unit 1030 is configured to send a first message to the primary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored.
可选的,收发单元1030还用于从所述主基站接收第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述辅基站恢复对所述终端设备的服务。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1030 is further configured to receive a first request from the primary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
可选的,所述第一消息中包括原因值,所述原因值用于标识所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。Optionally, the first message includes a cause value, and the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station cannot restore service to the terminal device.
可选的,所述第一资源包括以下至少一种:Optionally, the first resource includes at least one of the following:
所述辅基站为所述终端设备分配或预留的资源、所述辅基站保留的所述终端设备的上下文、所述辅基站与主基站之间的接口上的所述终端设备专用的控制面连接和用户面连接、辅基站与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接。The resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station for the terminal device, the context of the terminal device reserved by the secondary base station, and the dedicated control plane of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station and the primary base station Connection and user plane connection, the dedicated user plane connection of the terminal device between the secondary base station and the core network.
可选的,收发单元1030还用于向所述主基站发送保留的所述终端设备的上下文。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1030 is further configured to send the reserved context of the terminal device to the primary base station.
可选的,所述上下文包括以下信息中的至少一种:Optionally, the context includes at least one of the following information:
所述辅基站承载的服务质量QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,辅小区组SCG配置,所述辅基站承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,所述辅基站承载的所述PDCP上下文,所述辅基站承载的分组数据单元PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果,所述辅基站SN承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的SDAP的配置。The mapping relationship between the quality of service QoS flow carried by the secondary base station and the data radio bearer DRB, the secondary cell group SCG configuration, the configuration of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP carried by the secondary base station, and the PDCP context carried by the secondary base station, The security indication and security result of the packet data unit PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station, and the configuration of the SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN.
可选的,处理器1010具体可以基于自身负载确定释放所述第一资源。Optionally, the processor 1010 may specifically determine to release the first resource based on its own load.
上述实施例中的各个单元也可以称为模块或者电路或者部件。Each unit in the above embodiments may also be referred to as a module or circuit or component.
其中,以上列举的装置1000中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明,当该装置1000配置在或本身即为辅基站时,装置1000中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中辅基站所执行的各动作或处理过程。Among them, the functions and actions of the modules or units in the device 1000 listed above are only exemplary. When the device 1000 is configured in or is a secondary base station, the modules or units in the device 1000 can be used to execute the above methods. Actions or processing procedures performed by the secondary base station.
该装置1000所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For the concepts related to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application and related concepts, explanations, detailed descriptions, and other steps involved in the device 1000, please refer to the descriptions of these contents in the foregoing method or other embodiments, which are not repeated here.
根据前述方法,图18为本申请实施例提供的无线通信的装置1100的示意图。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of a wireless communication apparatus 1100 provided in an embodiment of this application.
其中,该装置1100可以为主基站,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于接入设备的芯片或电路。该装置1100可以包括处理单元1110(即,处理器的一例)和收发单元1130。Wherein, the device 1100 may be a main base station, or may be a chip or a circuit, for example, a chip or a circuit that may be set in an access device. The apparatus 1100 may include a processing unit 1110 (ie, an example of a processor) and a transceiver unit 1130.
可选的,收发单元1030可以通过收发器或者收发器相关电路或者接口电路实现。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1030 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit or interface circuit.
可选的,该装置还可以包括存储单元1120。一种可能的方式中,该存储单元1120用于存储指令。可选的,该存储单元也可以用于存储数据或者信息。存储单元1120可以通过存储器实现。Optionally, the device may further include a storage unit 1120. In one possible manner, the storage unit 1120 is used to store instructions. Optionally, the storage unit may also be used to store data or information. The storage unit 1120 may be realized by a memory.
一种可能的设计中,该处理单元1110用于执行该存储单元1120存储的指令,以使装置1100实现如上述方法中主基站(例如MN#1,或MN#2)执行的步骤。In a possible design, the processing unit 1110 is used to execute the instructions stored in the storage unit 1120, so that the device 1100 implements the steps performed by the master base station (for example, MN#1 or MN#2) in the above method.
进一步的,该处理单元1110、存储单元1120、收发单元1130可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号。例如,该存储单元1120用于存储计算机程序,该处理单元1110可以用于从该存储单元1120中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制收发单元1130接收信号和/或发送信号,完成上述方法中终端设备的步骤。该存储单元1120可以集成在处理单元1110中,也可以与处理单元1110分开设置。Further, the processing unit 1110, the storage unit 1120, and the transceiver unit 1130 may communicate with each other through internal connection paths, and transmit control and/or data signals. For example, the storage unit 1120 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 1110 can be used to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 1120 to control the transceiver unit 1130 to receive and/or send signals to complete the above method. Steps for terminal equipment. The storage unit 1120 may be integrated in the processing unit 1110, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 1110.
可选地,若该装置1100为通信设备(例如,主基站),该收发单元1130包括接收器和发送器。其中,接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时,可以统称为收发器。Optionally, if the apparatus 1100 is a communication device (for example, a main base station), the transceiver unit 1130 includes a receiver and a transmitter. The receiver and transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively called a transceiver.
可选地,若该装置1100为芯片或电路,该收发单元1130包括输入接口和输出接口。Optionally, if the device 1100 is a chip or a circuit, the transceiver unit 1130 includes an input interface and an output interface.
作为一种实现方式,收发单元1130的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理单元1110可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理单元或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation manner, the function of the transceiver unit 1130 may be implemented by a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver. The processing unit 1110 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
作为另一种实现方式,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的通信设备(例如,主基站)。即将实现处理单元1110、收发单元1130功能的程序代码存储在存储单元1120中,通用处理单元通过执行存储单元1120中的代码来实现处理单元1110、收发单元1130的功能。As another implementation manner, a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the communication device (for example, the main base station) provided in the embodiment of the present application. That is, the program code for realizing the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiver unit 1130 is stored in the storage unit 1120, and the general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 1110 and the transceiver unit 1130 by executing the code in the storage unit 1120.
在一种实现方式中,收发单元1130用于接收第一消息,所述第一消息用于通知所述 辅基站不能恢复对终端设备的服务,其中,所述终端设备处于无线资源控制RRC去激活态。In an implementation manner, the transceiver unit 1130 is configured to receive a first message, and the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored, wherein the terminal device is in radio resource control RRC deactivation state.
处理单元1110用于根据所述第一消息,确定所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The processing unit 1110 is configured to determine, according to the first message, that the secondary base station cannot restore the service to the terminal device.
可选的,收发单元1130还用于向所述辅基站发送第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述辅基站恢复对所述终端设备的服务。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send a first request to the secondary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
可选的,所述第一消息中包括原因值,所述原因值用于标识所述辅基站拒不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。Optionally, the first message includes a cause value, and the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station refuses to restore the service to the terminal device.
可选的,收发单元1130还用于所述主基站从所述辅基站接收所述终端设备的上下文。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to receive the context of the terminal device by the primary base station from the secondary base station.
可选的,所述上下文包括以下信息中的至少一种:Optionally, the context includes at least one of the following information:
所述辅基站承载的QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,辅小区组SCG配置,所述辅基站承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,所述辅基站承载的所述PDCH上下文,所述辅基站承载的PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果,所述辅基站SN承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的SDAP的配置。The mapping relationship between the QoS flow carried by the secondary base station and the data radio bearer DRB, the secondary cell group SCG configuration, the configuration of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP carried by the secondary base station, the PDCH context carried by the secondary base station, the The security indication and security result of the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station, and the configuration of the SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN.
可选的,处理单元1110还用于所述主基站释放保留的第二资源,所述第二资源为所述主基站与所述辅基站的接口上的所述终端设备专用的资源。Optionally, the processing unit 1110 is further configured to release a reserved second resource by the primary base station, where the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on the interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
可选的,处理单元1110还用于所述主基站建立用于承载服务质量QoS流/分组数据单元PDU会话的NG-U隧道,其中,在释放所述第二资源之前,所述QoS流/PDU会话承载在所述辅基站的NG-U隧道上。Optionally, the processing unit 1110 is further configured for the primary base station to establish an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flows/packet data unit PDU sessions, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/ The PDU session is carried on the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station.
可选的,收发单元1130还用于向所述终端设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于向所述终端设备通知释放所述辅基站的配置,其中,所述辅基站的配置包括SCG配置、辅基站配置的测量信息、功率配置信息中的至少一种。Optionally, the transceiver unit 1130 is further configured to send a second message to the terminal device, where the second message is used to notify the terminal device to release the configuration of the secondary base station, where the configuration of the secondary base station includes At least one of SCG configuration, measurement information configured by the secondary base station, and power configuration information.
其中,以上列举的装置1100中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明,当该装置1100配置在或本身即为主基站时,装置1100中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中主基站(例如,MN#1,或MN#2)所执行的各动作或处理过程,这里,为了避免赘述,省略其详细说明。The functions and actions of the modules or units in the device 1100 listed above are only exemplary. When the device 1100 is configured in or is a master base station, the modules or units in the device 1100 can be used to execute the above methods. Each action or processing procedure executed by the primary base station (for example, MN#1 or MN#2), here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.
该装置1100所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For the concepts related to the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application and related concepts, explanations, detailed descriptions, and other steps involved in the device 1100, please refer to the descriptions of these contents in the foregoing method or other embodiments, which are not repeated here.
图19为本申请提供的一种终端设备1200的结构示意图。该终端设备1200可以执行上述方法实施例中终端设备执行的动作。FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1200 provided by this application. The terminal device 1200 can perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
为了便于说明,图19仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图19所示,终端设备1200包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。For ease of description, FIG. 19 only shows the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 19, the terminal device 1200 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行上述传输预编码矩阵的指示方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据,例如存储上述实施例中所描述的码本。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器,主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the entire terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program, for example, to support the terminal device to execute the above-mentioned transmission precoding matrix instruction method embodiment The described action. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, for example, to store the codebook described in the above embodiments. The control circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals. The control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图19仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art can understand that, for ease of description, FIG. 19 only shows a memory and a processor. In actual terminal devices, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
例如,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图19中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。For example, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data. The central processing unit is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data. The processor in FIG. 19 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors and are interconnected by technologies such as buses. Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing the communication protocol and communication data can be built in the processor, or can be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to realize the baseband processing function.
示例性的,在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备1200的收发单元1210,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备1200的处理单元1220。如图19所示,终端设备1200包括收发单元1210和处理单元1220。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1210中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1210中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的,接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and control circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit 1210 of the terminal device 1200, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 1220 of the terminal device 1200. As shown in FIG. 19, the terminal device 1200 includes a transceiver unit 1210 and a processing unit 1220. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, and so on. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1210 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1210 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. Exemplarily, the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit, etc.
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备1300的结构示意图,可以用于实现上述方法中的接入设备(例如,主基站,或者辅基站)的功能。网络设备1300包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1310和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元,digital unit,DU)1320。所述RRU1310可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线1311和射频单元1312。所述RRU1310部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中所述的信令消息。所述BBU1320部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU1310与BBU1320可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 1300 provided by an embodiment of the application, which may be used to implement the function of an access device (for example, a primary base station or a secondary base station) in the foregoing method. The network equipment 1300 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1310 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DU) 1320. The RRU 1310 may be called a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 1311 and a radio frequency unit 1312. The RRU 1310 part is mainly used for receiving and sending of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending the signaling messages described in the foregoing embodiments to terminal equipment. The BBU 1320 part is mainly used for baseband processing, control of base stations, and so on. The RRU 1310 and the BBU 1320 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU1320为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如该BBU(处理单元)1320可以用于控制基站40执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。The BBU 1320 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading. For example, the BBU (processing unit) 1320 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
在一个示例中,所述BBU1320可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持 单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE系统,或5G系统),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。所述BBU1320还包括存储器1321和处理器1322。所述存储器1321用以存储必要的指令和数据。例如存储器1321存储上述实施例中的码本等。所述处理器1322用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器1321和处理器1322可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 1320 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network of a single access standard (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), and may also support different connections. Enter the standard wireless access network. The BBU 1320 further includes a memory 1321 and a processor 1322. The memory 1321 is used to store necessary instructions and data. For example, the memory 1321 stores the codebook in the above-mentioned embodiment. The processor 1322 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 1321 and the processor 1322 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
在一种可能的实施方式中,随着片上系统(system-on-chip,SoC)技术的发展,可以将1320部分和1310部分的全部或者部分功能由SoC技术实现,例如由一颗基站功能芯片实现,该基站功能芯片集成了处理器、存储器、天线接口等器件,基站相关功能的程序存储在存储器中,由处理器执行程序以实现基站的相关功能。可选的,该基站功能芯片也能够读取该芯片外部的存储器以实现基站的相关功能。In a possible implementation manner, with the development of system-on-chip (SoC) technology, all or part of the functions of part 1320 and part 1310 can be realized by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip To achieve, the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices, the program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the relevant functions of the base station. Optionally, the base station function chip can also read a memory external to the chip to implement related functions of the base station.
应理解,图20示例的网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的基站结构的可能。It should be understood that the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 20 is only a possible form, and should not constitute any limitation in the embodiment of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other base station structures that may appear in the future.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的主基站和辅基站。进一步的,该通信系统中还可以包括前述的终端设备。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned primary base station and secondary base station. Further, the communication system may also include the aforementioned terminal equipment.
应理解,本申请实施例中,该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present application, the processor may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), and dedicated integration Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (DRAM). Access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Take memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可 以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The foregoing embodiments can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any other combination. When implemented by software, the above-mentioned embodiments may be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center that includes one or more sets of available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium. The semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
本申请实施例还提供一种无线通信的系统,其包括上述主基站和辅基站。进一步的,该系统中还可以包括上述终端设备。An embodiment of the present application also provides a wireless communication system, which includes the above-mentioned primary base station and secondary base station. Further, the above-mentioned terminal device may also be included in the system.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述任一实施例中的主基站执行的步骤,或者辅基站执行的步骤。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the steps performed by the primary base station or the steps performed by the secondary base station in any of the foregoing embodiments are implemented.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一实施例中的主基站执行的步骤,或者辅基站执行的步骤。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which, when executed by a computer, realizes the steps performed by the primary base station or the steps performed by the secondary base station in any of the foregoing embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种系统芯片,该系统芯片包括:通信单元和处理单元。该处理单元,例如可以是处理器。该通信单元例如可以是输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。该处理单元可执行计算机指令,以使该通信装置内的芯片执行上述本申请实施例提供的主基站执行的步骤,或者辅基站执行的步骤。The embodiment of the present application also provides a system chip, which includes a communication unit and a processing unit. The processing unit may be a processor, for example. The communication unit may be, for example, an input/output interface, a pin, or a circuit. The processing unit can execute computer instructions so that the chip in the communication device executes the steps performed by the primary base station or the steps performed by the secondary base station provided in the above embodiments of the present application.
可选地,该计算机指令被存储在存储单元中。Optionally, the computer instructions are stored in a storage unit.
本申请中的各个实施例可以独立的使用,也可以进行联合的使用,这里不做限定。The various embodiments in this application can be used independently or in combination, which is not limited here.
另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" as used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (digital versatile discs, DVDs) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
应理解,在下文示出的实施例中,第一、第二仅为便于区分不同的对象,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,区分不同的消息、不同的请求等。It should be understood that in the embodiments shown below, the first and the second are only to facilitate the distinction between different objects, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. For example, distinguish different messages, different requests, etc.
还应理解,在下文示出的实施例中,“预先获取”可包括由网络设备信令指示或者预先定义,例如,协议定义。其中,“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。It should also be understood that in the embodiments shown below, "pre-acquisition" may include being indicated by network device signaling or pre-defined, for example, protocol definition. Among them, "pre-defined" can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in the equipment (for example, including terminal equipment and network equipment). This application does not make any specific implementation methods. limited.
还应理解,本申请实施例中涉及的“保存”,可以是指的保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器,可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器,也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。It should also be understood that the “saving” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to being stored in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device. The type of the memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括 LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。It should also be understood that the "protocol" in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include the LTE protocol, the NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
还应理解,“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“至少一个”是指一个或一个以上;“A和B中的至少一个”,类似于“A和/或B”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和B中的至少一个,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。It should also be understood that “and/or” describes the association relationship of the associated objects, which means that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. This situation. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or" relationship. "At least one" refers to one or more than one; "At least one of A and B", similar to "A and/or B", describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and B At least one of them can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may be aware that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device, and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (20)

  1. 一种准入控制的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for admission control, characterized in that it includes:
    辅基站确定释放为无线资源控制RRC去激活态的终端设备保留的第一资源,其中,所述第一资源为专用于所述终端设备的资源;The secondary base station determines to release the first resource reserved for the terminal device in a radio resource control RRC deactivated state, where the first resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device;
    所述辅基站向主基站发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于通知所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The secondary base station sends a first message to the primary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that the service to the terminal device cannot be restored.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述辅基站向所述主基站发送第一消息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein before the secondary base station sends the first message to the primary base station, the method further comprises:
    所述辅基站从所述主基站接收第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述辅基站恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The secondary base station receives a first request from the primary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息中包括原因值,所述原因值用于标识所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first message includes a cause value, and the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station cannot restore the service to the terminal device.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一资源包括以下至少一种:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the first resource includes at least one of the following:
    所述辅基站为所述终端设备分配或预留的资源、所述辅基站保留的所述终端设备的上下文、所述辅基站与主基站之间的接口上的所述终端设备专用的控制面连接和用户面连接、辅基站与核心网之间的该终端设备专用的用户面连接。The resources allocated or reserved by the secondary base station for the terminal device, the context of the terminal device reserved by the secondary base station, and the dedicated control plane of the terminal device on the interface between the secondary base station and the primary base station Connection and user plane connection, the dedicated user plane connection of the terminal device between the secondary base station and the core network.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising:
    所述辅基站向所述主基站发送保留的所述终端设备的上下文。The secondary base station sends the reserved context of the terminal device to the primary base station.
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上下文包括以下信息中的至少一种:The method according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the context includes at least one of the following information:
    所述辅基站承载的服务质量QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,辅小区组SCG配置,所述辅基站承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,所述辅基站承载的所述PDCP上下文,所述辅基站承载的分组数据单元PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果,所述辅基站承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的业务数据适配协议SDAP的配置。The mapping relationship between the quality of service QoS flow carried by the secondary base station and the data radio bearer DRB, the secondary cell group SCG configuration, the configuration of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP carried by the secondary base station, and the PDCP context carried by the secondary base station, The security indication and security result of the PDU session/QoS flow of the packet data unit carried by the secondary base station, and the configuration of the service data adaptation protocol SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station.
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述辅基站确定释放为无线资源控制RRC去激活态的终端设备保留的第一资源,包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the determining by the secondary base station to release the first resource reserved for the terminal device in the radio resource control RRC deactivated state comprises:
    所述辅基站基于所述辅基站的自身负载确定释放所述第一资源。The secondary base station determines to release the first resource based on its own load of the secondary base station.
  8. 一种准入控制的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for admission control, characterized in that it includes:
    主基站从辅基站接收第一消息,所述第一消息用于通知所述辅基站不能恢复对无线资源控制RRC去激活态的终端设备的服务;The primary base station receives a first message from the secondary base station, where the first message is used to notify the secondary base station that it cannot resume service to the terminal device in the RRC deactivated state;
    所述主基站根据所述第一消息,确定所述辅基站不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。According to the first message, the primary base station determines that the secondary base station cannot resume service to the terminal device.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述主基站从辅基站接收第一消息之前,还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein before the primary base station receives the first message from the secondary base station, the method further comprises:
    所述主基站向所述辅基站发送第一请求,所述第一请求用于请求所述辅基站恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The primary base station sends a first request to the secondary base station, where the first request is used to request the secondary base station to resume service to the terminal device.
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息中包括原因值,所 述原因值用于标识所述辅基站拒不能恢复对所述终端设备的服务。The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the first message includes a cause value, and the cause value is used to identify that the secondary base station refuses to restore the service to the terminal device.
  11. 根据权利要求8-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-10, further comprising:
    所述主基站从所述辅基站接收所述终端设备的上下文。The primary base station receives the context of the terminal device from the secondary base station.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上下文包括以下信息中的至少一种:The method according to claim 11, wherein the context includes at least one of the following information:
    所述辅基站承载的QoS流与数据无线承载DRB的映射关系,辅小区组SCG配置,所述辅基站承载的分组数据汇聚协议PDCP的配置,所述辅基站承载的所述PDCH上下文,所述辅基站承载的PDU会话/QoS流的安全指示和安全结果,所述辅基站SN承载的PDU会话/QoS流对应的SDAP的配置。The mapping relationship between the QoS flow carried by the secondary base station and the data radio bearer DRB, the secondary cell group SCG configuration, the configuration of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP carried by the secondary base station, the PDCH context carried by the secondary base station, the The security indication and security result of the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station, and the configuration of the SDAP corresponding to the PDU session/QoS flow carried by the secondary base station SN.
  13. 根据权利要求8-12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-12, further comprising:
    所述主基站释放保留的第二资源,所述第二资源为所述主基站与所述辅基站的接口上的所述终端设备专用的资源。The primary base station releases a reserved second resource, where the second resource is a resource dedicated to the terminal device on an interface between the primary base station and the secondary base station.
  14. 根据权利要求8-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-13, further comprising:
    所述主基站建立用于承载服务质量QoS流/分组数据单元PDU会话的NG-U隧道,其中,在释放所述第二资源之前,所述QoS流/PDU会话承载在所述辅基站的NG-U隧道上。The primary base station establishes an NG-U tunnel for carrying quality of service QoS flow/packet data unit PDU session, wherein, before releasing the second resource, the QoS flow/PDU session is carried on the NG-U tunnel of the secondary base station. -U tunnel.
  15. 根据权利要求8-14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-14, further comprising:
    所述主基站向所述终端设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于向所述终端设备通知释放所述辅基站的配置,其中,所述辅基站的配置包括SCG配置、辅基站配置的测量信息、功率配置信息中的至少一种。The primary base station sends a second message to the terminal device, where the second message is used to notify the terminal device to release the configuration of the secondary base station, where the configuration of the secondary base station includes SCG configuration and secondary base station configuration At least one of measurement information and power configuration information.
  16. 一种无线通信的装置,其特征在于,包括:用于执行权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法的单元。A wireless communication device, characterized by comprising: a unit for executing the method according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
  17. 一种无线通信的装置,其特征在于,包括:用于执行权利要求8至15中任一项所述的方法的单元。A wireless communication device, characterized by comprising: a unit for executing the method according to any one of claims 8 to 15.
  18. 一种无线通信的系统,其特征在于,包括如权利要求16的无线通信的装置和如权利要求17的无线通信的装置。A wireless communication system, characterized by comprising the wireless communication device according to claim 16 and the wireless communication device according to claim 17.
  19. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program runs on a computer,
    使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至7中任意一项所述的方法,或者Cause the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, or
    使得所述计算机执行如权利要求8至15中任意一项所述的方法。The computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 8 to 15.
  20. 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,A chip system, characterized by comprising: a processor, used to call and run a computer program from a memory,
    使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信设备执行如权利要求1至7中任意一项所述的方法;或者Enable the communication device installed with the chip system to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 7; or
    使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信设备执行如权利要求8至15中任意一项所述的方法。The communication device installed with the chip system is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 8 to 15.
PCT/CN2020/081415 2019-03-29 2020-03-26 Admission control method and device WO2020200038A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910251469.5A CN111757559A (en) 2019-03-29 2019-03-29 Admission control method and device
CN201910251469.5 2019-03-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020200038A1 true WO2020200038A1 (en) 2020-10-08

Family

ID=72664451

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/081415 WO2020200038A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2020-03-26 Admission control method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111757559A (en)
WO (1) WO2020200038A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107113907A (en) * 2014-11-07 2017-08-29 诺基亚通信公司 The method and apparatus managed for dual link
WO2018207368A1 (en) * 2017-05-12 2018-11-15 株式会社Nttドコモ Wireless communication system, secondary node and wireless communication method

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012135627A1 (en) * 2011-04-01 2012-10-04 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Multi-cell operation in non-cell_dch states
WO2018056718A1 (en) * 2016-09-23 2018-03-29 주식회사 케이티 Method and apparatus for changing connection state of terminal
EP3322254A1 (en) * 2016-11-11 2018-05-16 Nokia Technologies Oy Connection control for dual connectivity and interworking in wireless networks
US10849022B2 (en) * 2017-03-17 2020-11-24 Ofinno, Llc Cell selection of inactive state wireless device
US20190037635A1 (en) * 2017-07-28 2019-01-31 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus of recovering rrc connection in a wireless communication system
CN109451846B (en) * 2017-09-22 2023-05-02 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Method, device, user equipment and base station for realizing location area update

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN107113907A (en) * 2014-11-07 2017-08-29 诺基亚通信公司 The method and apparatus managed for dual link
WO2018207368A1 (en) * 2017-05-12 2018-11-15 株式会社Nttドコモ Wireless communication system, secondary node and wireless communication method

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"3GPP TSG-RAN WG3 #101", R3-185316, 24 August 2018 (2018-08-24), DOI: 20200610082203A *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111757559A (en) 2020-10-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6890687B2 (en) Avoiding race conditions between releasing the secondary base station at the start of the master base station and changing the secondary base station at the start of the secondary base station
WO2022016401A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
CN114900547B (en) Communication method and device
US20200053815A1 (en) Tunnel Modification for Split Bearers in Multi-RAT Dual Connectivity (MR-DC) and NR-NR Dual Connectivity (NR-DC)
WO2020200034A1 (en) Network access method and apparatus
WO2019242724A1 (en) Communication method, and paging method, device and system
WO2022036555A1 (en) Relay transmission method, relay terminal and remote terminal
WO2021203814A1 (en) Method and apparatus for processing time synchronization message
WO2022012506A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
EP4156849A1 (en) Communication method and related device
US20230086410A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2021185350A1 (en) Communication method, access network device, terminal device and core network device
WO2020032844A1 (en) Tunnel modification for split bearers in multi-rat dual connectivity (mr-dc) and nr-nr dual connectivity (nr-dc)
TW201836382A (en) Communication method, auxiliary network node, and terminal
WO2020135645A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
US20200145871A1 (en) Method for controlling network congestion, terminal device and network device
US20230021397A1 (en) Time Synchronization Packet Processing Method and Apparatus
WO2020200038A1 (en) Admission control method and device
WO2020238596A1 (en) Handover method, apparatus and communications system
WO2021164331A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
EP4282223B1 (en) Signaling for releasing a secondary cell group (scg) configuration
WO2023050181A1 (en) Wireless communication method and wireless communication apparatus
WO2022213264A1 (en) Terminal capability notification method, terminal device, and network device
WO2024066947A1 (en) Communication method and related device
WO2021030984A1 (en) Configuration method and apparatus, and computer readable storage medium and system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20783399

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20783399

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1